Mechanical Engineering

1

SRI VENKATESWARA COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING (An Autonomous Institution, Affiliated to Anna University, Chennai)

SRIPERUMBUDUR TK - 602 117

REGULATION – 2018

B.E. Mechanical Engineering Choice Based Credit System

I-VIII Semesters CURRICULUM

S.NO. COURSE

CODE COURSE TITLE CATEGORY

CONTACT PERIODS

L T P C Prerequisites Fixed/

Movable

THEORY

1 HS18151 Communicative English (Common to All Branches)

HS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

2 MA18151 Engineering Mathematics I (Common to All Branches except MR)

BS 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F

3 PH18151 Engineering Physics (Common to All Branches)

BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

4 CY18151 Engineering Chemistry (Common to All Branches except MR)

BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

5 EE18151

Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering (common to AE, BT, CE, CS, IT, MR & ME)

ES 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

6 GE18151 Engineering Drawing (Common to All Branches)

ES 5 3 0 2 4 Nil F

PRACTICAL

1 PC18161 Physics and Chemistry Laboratory (Common to All Branches)

BS 2 0 0 2 1 Nil F

2 GE18161

Engineering Practices Laboratory (Common to All Branches)

ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

TOTAL 26 18 1 7 22.5 - -

(Recommended by BoS - Meeting held on 28.07.2018)

2

SEMESTER II

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT PERIODS


Movable

THEORY

1 HS18251 Technical English (Common to All Branches)

HS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

2 MA18251 Engineering Mathematics II (Common to All Branches Except MR)

BS 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F

3 IT18101 Programming for Problem Solving (Common to All Branches Except MR)

ES 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

4 GE18251 Environmental Science and Engineering (Common to All Branches)

BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

5 ME18201 Engineering Mechanics (Common to ME & MR)

ES 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

6 PH18253 Material Science BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

PRACTICAL

1 IT18111 Programming for Problem Solving Laboratory (Common to All Branches except MR)

ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

2 ME18211 Machine Drawing Laboratory PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

TOTAL 25 18 1 6 22 - -


SEMESTER III

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT PERIODS


Movable

THEORY

1 MA18351 Engineering Mathematics – III (Common to BT, CH, CE, EE, EC, ME)

BS 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F

2 ME18301 Engineering Thermodynamics

PC 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F

3 ME18302 Manufacturing Processes PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

4 ME18303 Material Characterization and Metallurgy

PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

5 ME18304 Mechanics of Solids ES 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F

6 EE18352 Electrical Drives and Control Systems

ES 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

PRACTICAL

1 EE18361 Electrical and Electronics Engineering Laboratory

ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

2 ME18311 Manufacturing Processes Laboratory

PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

3 ME18312 Material Testing and Metallurgy Laboratory

ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

TOTAL 30 18 3 9 25.5 - -


3

SEMESTER IV

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT PERIODS


Movable

THEORY

1 MA18451 Computational Methods (Common to CH, CE, EE, MR & ME)

BS 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

2 ME18401 Thermal Engineering PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME18301 F

3 ME18402 Machine Tools and Machining Processes

PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

4 ME18403 Kinematics of Machinery PC 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F

5 ME18404 Hydraulics and Pneumatics Systems (Common to ME & AE)

PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

6 ME18405 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery

ES 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F

PRACTICAL

1 ME18411 Fluid Mechanics and Machinery laboratory (Common to ME & AE)

ES 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

2 ME18412 Metal Machining Laboratory

PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

3 ME18413 Thermal Engineering Laboratory

PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

TOTAL 30 17 4 9 25.5 - -

SEMESTER V

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT PERIODS


Movable

THEORY

1 ME18501 Metrology and Quality Control

PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

2 ME18502 Dynamics of Machinery PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME18403 F

3 ME18503 Design of Machine Elements

PC 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F

4 ME18504 Heat and Mass Transfer PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME18301 ME18401

F

5

Professional Elective - I PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M

6

Open Elective - I OE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M

PRACTICAL

1 ME18511 Dynamics and Vibrations Laboratory

PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

2 ME18512 Metrology and Instrumentation Laboratory

PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

3 ME18513 Heat Transfer, Refrigeration & Air conditioning Laboratory

PC 3 0 0 3 1.5 Nil F

TOTAL 30 18 3 9 25.5 - -


4

SEMESTER VI

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT PERIODS


Movable

THEORY

1 ME18601 Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing

PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

2 ME18602 Design of Transmission Systems

PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME18503 F

3 ME18603 Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsion

PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME 18301 F

4

Professional Elective – II PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M

5

Professional Elective – III PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M

6

Open Elective – II OE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M

PRACTICAL

1 ME18611 Design and Fabrication Project

EEC 4 0 0 4 2 Nil F

2 ME18612 Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing Laboratory

PC 4 0 0 4 2 Nil F

3 HS18561

Interview and Career Skills Laboratory (Common to all branches except BT & EE)

EEC 3 0 0 3 2 Nil F

TOTAL 31 18 2 11 26 - -

(Recommended by BoS – Meeting held on 23.02.2019)

SEMESTER VII

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT PERIODS


Movable

THEORY

1 ME18701 Finite Element Analysis PC 4 3 1 0 4 ME 18304 ME 18401

F

2 ME18702 Computer Integrated Manufacturing

PC 3 3 0 0 3 Nil F

3 ME18703 Mechatronics PC 4 3 1 0 4 Nil F

4

Professional Elective – IV PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M

5

Professional Elective – V PE 3 3 0 0 3 Nil M

PRACTICAL

1 ME18711 Comprehension EEC 2 0 0 2 1 Nil

F

2 ME18712 Finite Element Analysis and Simulation Laboratory

PC 4 0 0 4 2 Nil F

2 ME18713 Mechatronics Laboratory PC 4 0 0 4 2 Nil F

TOTAL 27 15 2 10 22 - -


5

SEMESTER VIII

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT PERIODS


Movable

THEORY

1.

Professional Elective – VI PE 3 3 0 0 0 Nil M

PRACTICAL

1 ME18811 Project Work EEC 24 0 0 24 12 Nil F

TOTAL 27 3 0 24 15 - -


Total Credits = 22.5+22+25.5+25.5+25.5+26+22+15 = 184

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I, IV, V (To be chosen during ODD SEMESTER)

S.NO. COURSE

CODE COURSE TITLE

1 ME18001 Automobile Engineering

2 ME18003 Bio Materials

3 ME18005 Composite Materials and Mechanics (Common to ME & AE)

4 ME18007 Design for Manufacturing and Assembly

5 ME18009 Design of Heat Exchangers

6 ME18011 Energy Conservation and Waste Heat Recovery

7 ME18013 Enterprise Resource Planning

8 CS18851 Fundamentals of Artificial Intelligence (Common to EE & ME)

9 GE18051 Intellectual Property Rights (Common to all Branches except BT)

10 ME18015 Lean Six Sigma

11 ME18017 Mechanical Vibrations and Noise Control

12 ME18019 Non Destructive Testing and Evaluation

13 ME18021 Plant Layout Design and Ergonomics

14 ME18023 Power Plant Engineering

15 GE18551 Principles of Management (Common to EC, AE, BT, EE & ME)

16 ME18025 Process planning and Cost Estimation

17 ME18027 Refrigeration and Air Conditioning

18 ME18029 Renewable Energy Resources (Common to ME & MR)

19 ME18031 Surface Engineering and Tribology


PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II, III, VI (To be chosen during EVEN SEMESTER)

S.NO. COURSE

CODE COURSE TITLE

1 ME18002 3D Printing and Design

2 ME18004 Advanced I.C. Engines

3 ME18006 Automobile Electronics

6

4 ME18008 Biogas Engineering

5 ME18010 Computational Fluid Dynamics (Common to ME & AE)

6 ME18012 Design of Experiments (Common to ME, AE, CE & CH)

7 ME18014 Digital Manufacturing

8 ME18016 Engineering Economic Analysis

9 ME18018 Entrepreneurship Development

10 AE18602 Hybrid and Electric Vehicles (Common to AE and ME)

11 ME18020 Industrial Robotics (Common to ME, AE, & MR)

12 ME18022 Industrial Safety, Maintenance and Ethics

13 ME18024 Micro Controllers and Embedded System

14 ME18028 Nanomaterials

15 ME18026 Operations Research (Common to ME, AE & CH)

16 ME18030 Product Design and Development

17 ME18032 Sensors for Automation

18 ME18034 Thermal Turbo Machines

19 GE18052 Total Quality Management


PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVES (Can be chosen whenever offered)

S.NO. COURSE

CODE COURSE TITLE

1. SE18001 Artificial Intelligence and Robotics (Common to all branches except MR)

2. SE18002 Corporate Finance (Common to all branches except MR)

3. SE18003 Financial Statement Analysis (Common to all branches except MR)

4. SE18004 Managerial Economics (Common to all branches except MR)

5. SE18005 Market Research (Common to all branches except MR)

6. SE18006 Production Management (Common to all branches except MR)

7. SE18007 Project Management (Common to all branches except MR)

8. SE18008 Securities Market - Beginner's Module (Common to all branches except MR)

9. SE18009 Supply Chain Management (Common to all branches except MR)


OPEN ELECTIVE – I (Offered by Mechanical Engineering Department during Odd Semester)

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT HOURS

L T P C

1. OE18001 Basics of Mechanical Engineering OE 3 3 0 0 3

2. OE18003 Elements of Mechanical Components OE 3 3 0 0 3

3. OE18005 Industrial Engineering and Management

OE 3 3 0 0 3

4. OE18007 Basics of Energy Resources OE 3 3 0 0 3


7

OPEN ELECTIVE – II

(Offered by Mechanical Engineering Department during Even Semester)

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT HOURS

L T P C

1. OE18002 Elements of Automation OE 3 3 0 0 3

2. OE18004 Quality concepts and tools OE 3 3 0 0 3

3. OE18006 Refrigeration and Air conditioning Systems

OE 3 3 0 0 3

4. OE18008 Thermal Management of Electronics devices

OE 3 3 0 0 3


Value Added Courses (To be completed in between III semester to VI semester)

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT HOURS

L T P C

1 VD18001 Advanced Gear Manufacturing Concepts

VA 2 2 0 0 2

2 VD18002 Condition Monitoring of Machine Tools

VA 2 2 0 0 2

3 VD18003 Design and Development of Jigs and Fixtures

VA 2 2 0 0 2

4 VD18004 Design and Development of Press Tools

VA 2 2 0 2 2

5 VD18005 Engine Instrumentation and Testing

VA 2 2 0 0 2

6 VD18006 Geometrical Dimensioning and Tolerance

VA 2 2 0 0 2

7 VD18007 Kaizen and its Applications VA 2 2 0 0 2

8 VD18008 Kinematic Analysis of Mechanical Links

VA 2 2 0 0 2

9 VC18001 Communicative German (Common to all branches except MR)

VA 2 2 0 0 2

10 VC18002 Communicative Japanese (Common to all branches except MR)

VA 2 2 0 0 2

11 VC18003 Communicative Hindi (Common to all branches except MR)

VA 2 2 0 0 2

12 VC18004 Design Thinking and Prototyping Laboratory (Common to All Branches)

VA 2 2 0 2 2

13 VC18005 Basics of Entrepreneurship Development (Common to All Branches)


8

Mandatory Courses (To be completed in between III semester to VI semester)

S.NO. COURSE


CONTACT HOURS

L T P C

1. MC18001 Indian Constitution and Society (Common to all branches except MR)

MC 3 3 0 0 3


OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED BY OTHER DEPARTMENT

Open Electives offered in ODD Semester

SL. NO.

COURSE CODE

COURSE TITLE Offering

Department

1. OE181001 Fundamentals of Automobile Engineering AUT

2. OE181003 Fundamentals of Automotive Air Conditioning AUT

3. OE18201 Introduction to Biofuels and Bioenergy BIO

4. OE18203 Basics of Environmental Biotechnology BIO

5. OE18205 Introduction to Bioinformatics and Computational Biology BIO

6. OE18207 Basics of Nanobiotechnology BIO

7. OE18209 Introduction to Biomaterials BIO

8. OE18301 Waste to Energy CHE

9. OE18303 Industrial Safety CHE

10. OE18305 Composite Materials CHE

11. OE18307 Industrial Waste Water Treatment CHE

12. OE18309 Fuel Cell Technology CHE

13. OE18401 Basic Civil Engineering CVE

14. OE18403 Fundamentals of Remote Sensing and GIS CVE

15. OE18501 Basic Operating System CSE

16. OE18503 Basics on Cyber Security and Ethical Hacking CSE

17. OE18505 Introduction to Internet of Things CSE

18. OE18507 Multimedia & Animation Techniques CSE

19. OE18509 Python Programming CSE

20. OE18601 Electrical Machines and Applications EEE

21. OE18603 Control system Engineering EEE

22. OE18605 Micro and Smart Grid EEE

23. OE18607 Electric Vehicle Technology EEE

9

24. OE18609 Nano-technology EEE

25. OE18701 Autotronics ECE

26. OE18703 Sensing Techniques ECE

27. OE18705 System Design using Microcontrollers ECE

28. OE18801 IT essentials for engineers INT

29. OE18803 Internet of Everything INT

30. OE18805 Foundation on Mobile App Development INT

31. OE18901 Elements of Marine Engineering MAR

32. OE18903 Marine Propulsion MAR

33. OE18001 Basics of Mechanical Engineering MEC

34. OE18003 Elements of Mechanical Components MEC

35. OE18005 Industrial Engineering and Management MEC

36. OE18007 Basics of Energy Resources MEC

Open Electives offered in EVEN Semester

SL. NO.

COURSE CODE

COURSE TITLE Offering

Department

1. OE18102 Automotive Fault Diagnostics AUT

2. OE18104 Fundamentals of Automotive Safety and Maintenance AUT

3. OE18106 Fundamentals of Automotive Pollution and Control Methods AUT

4. OE18202 Introduction to Food Manufacturing BIO

5. OE18204 Testing of Biological Materials BIO

6. OE18206 Introduction to Tissue Engineering BIO

7. OE18208 Introduction to Cancer Biology BIO

8. OE18210 Basic Bio-pharmaceutical Technology BIO

9. OE18302 Industrial Pollution Prevention CHE

10. OE18304 Solid Waste Management CHE

11. OE18306 Plant Utilities CHE

12. OE18308 Green Energy CHE

13. OE18310 Energy Management CHE

14. OE18402 Integrated Solid Waste Management CVE

15. OE18404 Life Cycle Assessment CVE

16. OE18502 Artificial Intelligence Basics CSE

10

17. OE18504 Database Systems and Applications CSE

18. OE18506 Internet Programming CSE

19. OE18508 Introduction to Cloud & Big Data Analytics CSE

20. OE18510 Introduction to Data Structures CSE

21. OE18602 Industrial Automation EEE

22. OE18604 MEMS and Nano Devices EEE

23. OE18606 Renewable Energy Systems EEE

24. OE18608 Indian Power Grid EEE

25. OE18610 Power Converters EEE

26. OE18702 Consumer Electronics ECE

27. OE18704 Introduction to Communication Systems ECE

28. OE18706 Robotics Systems ECE

29. OE18802 Embedded and Real Time Systems INT

30. OE18804 Ethical hacking and IT security INT

31. OE18806 User Interface Design INT

32. OE18808 AI for Android INT

33. OE18902 Introduction to Marine Diesel Engines and machineries MAR

34. OE18904 Marine Vehicles MAR

35. OE18002 Elements of Automation MEC

36. OE18004 Quality concepts and tools MEC

37. OE18006 Refrigeration and Air conditioning Systems MEC

38. OE18008 Thermal Management of Electronics devices MEC

OPEN ELECTIVES OFFERED BY HUMANATIES AND SCIENCE DEPARTMENTS

1. OP18001 Sensors and Transducers APH

2. OP18002 Essential Properties for Selection of Materials APH

3. OP18003 Opto Electronics and applications APH

4. OP18004 Basics of Environmental Safety APH

5. OH18001 Gender sensitization and Social Impact HSS

6. OH18002 Content Writing HSS

7. OH18003 Critical Thinking HSS

8. OH18004 Environmental Law, Policy and International Conventions HSS

11

9. OH18005 Urban / Rural Development and Constitutional Provisions HSS

10. OH18006 Climate Change and Vulnerability Assessment HSS

11. OC18001 Advanced Engineering Chemistry ACH

12. OC18002 Industrial Chemistry ACH

13. OC18003 Chemistry in Food Industry ACH

14. OC18004 Fuel cell Chemistry ACH

15. OC18005 Waste water Treatment ACH

16. OM18001 Statistical methods for Engineers AMA

17. OM18002 Linear Programming AMA

18. OM18003 Linear Algebra for Engineers AMA

19. OM18004 Transform techniques for Boundary value problems AMA


Mechanical Engineering Students can choose Open Electives offered only by other departments Summary

SL.

NO. CATEGORY

CREDITS IN SEMESTER Total

Credits I II III IV V VI VII VIII

1 Humanities and Social Sciences

including Management courses (HS) 3 3

6

2 Basic Science courses (BS) 11 10 4 3

28

3

Engineering Science courses including

workshop, drawing, basics of

electrical/mechanical/computer etc

(ES)

8.5 7.5 10 5.5

31.5

4 Professional Core courses (PC)

1.5 11.5 17 19.5 13 15

77.5

5 Professional Elective courses relevant

to chosen specialization/branch (PE) 3 6 6 3 18

6

Open subjects - Electives from other

technical and /or emerging subjects

(OE) 3 3

6

7 Project work, seminar and internship

in industry or elsewhere (EEC) 4 1 12 17

8 Mandatory Courses

(MC) 0

0

Total 22.5 22 25.5 25.5 25.5 26 22 15 184

12

Online Courses (To be completed in between III semester to VI semester)

1. Students may be permitted to credit three online course (which is provided with certificate) subject to a

maximum of three credits. The approved list of online courses will be provided by the Department

Consultative Committee from time to time.

2. The student needs to obtain certification or credit to become eligible for appear for oral examination to be

conducted by Department of Mechanical Engineering.

3. The student can drop any three, 3 credit Professional Elective course on successful completion of online

course (which should be 12-week duration).

4. If the student has failed in the online course conducted by the external / organizing agency, the oral

examination will not be conducted.

Internship / Industrial Visit

(Mandatory)

1. The students should undergo Industrial training / Internship for a period of 2 to 4 weeks during summer

/ winter vacation and should earn a minimum of 1 credit or a maximum of 2 credits.

2. The Internship / Industrial training to be completed between 4th to 6th semester

3. The students may undergo Internship at Research organization / University (after due approval from the

Department Consultative Committee) for a period prescribed in the curriculum during summer / winter

vacation, in lieu of Industrial training.

13

SEMESTER - I

HS18151 COMMUNICATIVE ENGLISH L T P C

(Common to all Branches) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To enable learners to interact fluently on everyday social contexts.

To enable learners to engage in conversations in an academic/scholarly setting.

To enable learners to overcome public speaking barriers.

To develop learners’ ability to take notes and in the process, improve their listening skills

To develop learners’ reading skill through reading text passages for comprehension and

contemplation.

To enable learners to write on topics of general interest and drafting correspondences for

general purposes.

UNIT I 9

Listening - short video clips - conversational scenes form movies, celebrities’ speeches/interviews.

Speaking - several ways of introducing oneself at several situations, introducing others at several

situations, inviting people for several occasions, describing people and their places. Reading -

short comprehension passages - making inferences, critical analysis. Writing - completing the

incomplete sentences - developing hints from the given information. Grammar - Wh-Questions

and Yes or No questions - Parts of speech. Vocabulary development - prefixes - suffixes - articles -

countable / uncountable nouns.

UNIT II 9

Listening - customer care voice files, short narratives - identifying problems and developing

telephone etiquettes. Speaking - speaking over skype/whatsapp, making business calls, making

self-recorded informative videos, inquiring about a concept/activity, describing a concept/activity.

Reading - reading the headlines on news magazines - slogans and taglines from advertisements.

Writing - free writing - writing - headlines , slogans and taglines individual inspirations. Grammar

- conjunctions, idioms, phrases, quotes. Vocabulary development - guessing the meanings of

words in various different contexts.

UNIT III 9

Listening - courtroom scenes from movies, debates and talks from news channels, notes taking.

Speaking - language and tone for arguments, discussion, deliberation, contemplation, expressing

opinions, reacting to different situations in an alien country. Reading - language used in instruction

manuals of household appliances, cookery and other basic instructions. Writing- understanding the

structure of texts - use of reference words, discourse markers-coherence, rearranging the jumbled

sentences. Grammar - adjectives - degrees of comparison, framing direct and indirect questions.

Vocabulary development - concise approach, single word substitution.

UNIT IV 9

Listening - Sports commentaries, advertisements with users’ criticisms; Speaking - for social

causes, for promoting a concept, negotiating and bargaining; Reading - review of a product, movie,

movement or a system; Writing - writing for advertisements, selling a product; Grammar - Tenses

- Simple Past, Present and Future, Continuous - Past, Present and Future; Vocabulary

Development - synonyms, antonyms and phrasal verbs.

14

UNIT V 9

Listening - video lectures, video demonstration of a concept; Speaking - presenting

papers/concepts, delivering short speeches, discourses on health, suggesting natural home

remedies, cleanliness, civic sense and responsibilities; Reading - columns and articles on home

science; Writing - correspondences of requests, basic enquiry/observation and basic complaints;

Grammar - modal verbs, perfect tenses - Vocabulary development - collocations.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

Assessment:

3 Continuous assessments (reading, writing, grammar, and 3 assignments (1 assignment

focuses on listening 2 assignments focus on speaking; evaluation of students’ speeches and

recorded clippings)

OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, learners will be able to

Read articles and infer meanings from specific contexts from magazines and newspapers.

Participate effectively in informal/casual conversations; introduce themselves and their

friends and express opinions in English.

Comprehend conversations and short talks delivered in English.

Write short write-ups and personal letters and emails in English.

REFERENCES:

1. Department of English, Anna University, Mindscapes : English for Technologists and

Engineers. Orient Black Swan, Chennai, 2017. 2.

3.

4.

Downes and Colm, "Cambridge English for Job-hunting", Cambridge University Press, New

Delhi, 2008.

Murphy and Raymond, "Intermediate English Grammar with Answers", Cambridge University

Press, 2000.

Thomson, A.J., "Practical English Grammar 1 & 2", Oxford, 1986.

Websites

1. http://www.usingenglish.com

2. http://www.uefap.com3

3. https://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/

4. www.learnenglishfeelgood.com/esl-printables-worksheets.html

Software

1. Face 2 Face Advance – Cambridge University Press, 2014.

2. English Advance Vocabulary- Cambridge University Press.

3. IELTS test preparation – Cambridge University Press 2017.

4. Official Guide to the TOEFL Test With CD-ROM, 4th Edition.

5. CAMBRIDGE Preparation for the TOEFL TEST- Cambridge University Press, 2017.

15

MA18151 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I L T P C

(Common to all Branches Except MR) 3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES:

To understand and apply matrix techniques for engineering applications.

To make the student knowledgeable in statistical methods of analyzing and interpret the

data for engineering problems.

To familiarize the student with basic calculus including functions of several variables.

This is needed in many branches of engineering.

To acquaint the student with mathematical tools needed in evaluating multiple integrals

and their usage.

UNIT I MATRICES 12

Eigen values and Eigen vectors of a real matrix - Characteristic equation - Properties of Eigen

values and Eigen vectors - Statement and Applications of Cayley-Hamilton Theorem -

Diagonalization of matrices - Reduction of a quadratic form into canonical form by orthogonal

transformation - Nature of quadratic forms.

UNIT II STATISTICAL METHODS 12

Scatter diagram - Karl Pearson coefficient of correlation for raw data - Spermann rank correlation

coefficient - lines of regression - Regression equation X on Y and Y on X- Curve fitting by

Principle of least squares - Fitting a straight line and a parabola .

UNIT III APPLICATION OF DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS 12

Curvature in Cartesian co-ordinates - Centre and radius of curvature - Circle of curvature -

Evolutes - Envelopes.

UNIT IV DIFFERENTIAL CALCULUS OF SEVERAL VARIABLES 12

Limits and Continuity - Partial derivatives - Total derivatives - Differentiation of implicit functions

- Jacobians and properties - Taylor’s series for functions of two variables - Maxima and Minima of

functions of two variables - Lagrange’s method of undetermined multipliers.

UNIT V MULTIPLE INTEGRALS 12

Double integrals in Cartesian and polar coordinates - Change of order of integration - Area

enclosed by plane curves - Change of variables in double integrals - Triple integrals - Volume of

solids.

TOTAL (L:45 + T:15) : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

This course equips the students to have basic knowledge and understanding of

fundamental statistics to analyze and interpret data.

Basic application of calculus in Engineering problems and to tackle for different

geometries.

To apply the idea of reducing complex Engineering problems into simple form using

matrix technique.

TEXT BOOKS:

16

1. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 8th Edition, John Wiley, 1999.

2.

3.

Bali N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Text book of Engineering Mathematics", Eighth Edition,

Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2011.

Grewal. B.S, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 41st Edition, Khanna Publications, Delhi,

2011.

17

REFERENCES:

1. Gupta S.C and Kapoor V.K, "Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics", S.Chand Private

Ltd.,11th Edition, 2005.

2. Glyn James, "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,

2012.

3. Peter V.O’Neil, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012. 4.

5.

Ramana B.V, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,

New Delhi, 2008.

Sivarama Krishna Das P. and Rukmangadachari E., "Engineering Mathematics", Volume I,

Second Edition, Pearson Publishing, 2011.

18

PH18151 ENGINEERING PHYSICS L T P C


OBJECTIVES:

To enhance the fundamental knowledge in Physics and its applications relevant to various

streams of Engineering and Technology.

UNIT I CRYSTAL PHYSICS 12

Unit cell - Bravais Lattices - Miller indices - Distance between Inter planar distance ‘d’

(derivation) - discussion of various crystal structures: calculation of Atomic radius, Coordination

number, effective number of lattice points and Atomic Packing Factor for the SC, BCC, FCC,

HCP, Diamond Cubic (derivation) - discussion about the NaCl, Graphite structures. Crystal defects

: Zero dimensional, one dimensional, Two dimensional and Three dimensional defects. Diffraction

of X-rays by crystal planes - Bragg’s spectrometer - Powder Diffraction method.

UNIT II THERMAL PHYSICS 6

Modes of heat transfer: Newton’s law of cooling - thermal conductivity - Lee’s disc method

(derivation and expt) - Radial heat flow - Rubber tube method - conduction through compound

media (series and parallel).

UNIT III WAVE MECHANICS 9

Quantum principles: Black body radiation - Planck Hypothesis (qualitative), Compton’s effect

(derivation).

Wave-particle duality - De-Broglie matter waves - Heisenberg’s uncertainty principle - Wave

function and its significance - Schrödinger’s wave equation (time dependent and Time

independent) (derivation) - Application of Schrodinger’s wave equation - Particle in one

dimensional box (derivation ) - Degenerate and non-degenerate energy states.

UNIT IV ACOUSTICS AND ULTRASONICS 9

Acoustics: Classification of Sound - Characteristics of Musical Sound - Quality (Timbre), Pitch,

Intensity of Sound - Units of Sound - decibel - Reverberation of sound - Reverberation time -

absorption of sound energy by materials - Absorption coefficient - Sabine’s Formula (derivation) -

Factors affecting the acoustics of buildings - Remedies.

Ultrasonics : Introduction to ultrasonics - Properties of ultrasonic waves - Production of

Ultrasonics - Magnetostriction method, Piezo electric method - detection of ultrasonics -

Ultrasonic Acoustic grating - Applications of ultrasonic waves - SONAR, NDT, Sonogram.

UNIT V OPTOELECTRONICS AND FIBER OPTICS 9

Lasers: Basic properties of Lasers - Einstein’s coefficients (Derivation) - Population inversion -

Types of Lasers - Molecular Gas Lasers (CO2 Laser) - Solid state Laser (Nd: YAG Laser) -

Applications of Lasers in Engineering and Medicine.

Fibre optics: Introduction - Principle and structure of optical fibers - Acceptance angle-Numerical

aperture-Types of optical fibers-Optical fiber communication system (block diagram) -

Advantages and its applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

Students will be able to

19

gain working knowledge of fundamental physics and basic engineering principles in one or more

engineering disciplines.

to understand and to compute problems in Quantum Physics.

to use modern engineering physics techniques and tools.

to enhance knowledge about photonics and optical fiber communication system.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gaur R.K. and Gupta S.L, "Engineering Physics", Dhanput Publications, 2015.

2.

3.

4.

Shatendra Sharma and Jyotsna Sharma, "Engineering Physics", Pearson, 2006.

Rajendran V, "Engineering Physics", Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.

Arumugam M, "Materials Science", Anuradha Publications, 2015.

REFERENCES:

1. David Halliday, Robert Resnick Jearl Walker, "Principles of Physics", 10th Edition, Wiley,

2015.

2. Peter Atkins and Julio De Paula, "Physical Chemistry", 10th Edition., Oxford University Press,

2014.

3. Arthur Beiser, Shobhit Mahajan and Rai Choudhury S, "Concepts of Modern Physics", 7th

Edition, McGraw Hill Education, 2017. 4. Raghavan V, "Materials Science and Engineering", PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2010.

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=David+Halliday%2C+Robert+Resnick+Jearl+Walker&search-alias=stripbooks

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Arthur+Beiser&search-alias=stripbooks

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=Shobhit+Mahajan&search-alias=stripbooks

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_3?ie=UTF8&field-author=S.+Rai+Choudhury&search-alias=stripbooks

20

CY18151 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY L T P C


OBJECTIVES:

To make the students conversant with boiler feed water requirements, related problems and

the water treatment techniques.

To develop an understanding the principle, types and mechanism of corrosion and

protective coatings.

To acquaint the students with the basics of nanomaterials, their properties and applicants.

To develop an understanding of the laws of photochemistry and basic spectral (UV and IR)

analysis.

To enable the students to understand the types of fuels, its calorific values and the

significance flue gas analysis.

UNIT I WATER TECHNOLOGY 9

Sources, hard & soft water, estimation of hardness by EDTA method, boiler feed water, boiler

problems, cause and preventive measures, softening of water, zeolite process & demineralization

by ion exchangers, internal treatment methods, specifications for drinking water, BIS & WHO

standards, treatment of water for domestic use, desalination - reverse osmosis & electrodialysis.

UNIT II CORROSION AND ITS CONTROL 9

Corrosion: Basic concepts - mechanism of chemical, electrochemical corrosion - Pilling Bedworth

rule – Types of Electrochemical corrosion - galvanic corrosion - differential aeration corrosion -

pitting corrosion – stress corrosion – factors influencing corrosion. Corrosion control: Cathodic

protection – sacrificial anodic method - corrosion inhibitors. Protective coatings: surface

preparation For metallic coatings - electro plating (copper plating) and electroless plating (Nickel

plating) - chemical conversion coatings - anodizing, phosphating & chromate coating.

UNIT III NANOCHEMISTRY 9

Basics - distinction between molecules, nanoparticles and bulk materials; size-dependent

properties. nanoparticles: nano cluster, nano rod, nanotube (CNT) and nanowire. Synthesis:

precipitation, thermolysis, hydrothermal, solvothermal, electrodeposition, chemical vapour

deposition, laser ablation; Properties and applications of nanomaterials.

UNIT IV PHOTOCHEMISTRY AND SPECTROSCOPY 9

Photochemistry: Laws of photochemistry - Grotthuss - Draper law, Stark-Einstein law and

Lambert Beer Law. Quantum efficiency - Photo processes - Internal Conversion, Inter-system

crossing, Fluorescence, Phosphorescence and Photo-sensitization. Spectroscopy: Electromagnetic

spectrum - Absorption of radiation - Electronic, Vibrational and rotational transitions. UV-visible

and IR spectroscopy - principles, instrumentation (Block diagram only) and applications.

UNIT V FUELS AND COMBUSTION 9

Fuel: Introduction - classification of fuels - calorific value - higher and lower calorific values - coal

analysis of coal (proximate and ultimate) - carbonization - manufacture of metallurgical coke (Otto

Hoffmann method) - petroleum- refining - manufacture of synthetic petrol (Bergius process) -

knocking octane number - diesel oil - cetane number - natural gas - compressed natural gas (CNG)

- liquefied petroleum gases (LPG) - producer gas - water gas. Combustion of fuels: introduction -

theoretical calculation of calorific value - calculation of stoichiometry of fuel and air ratio - flue

gas analysis by ORSAT Method.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

21

OUTCOMES:

The knowledge acquired on fuels, corrosion and its control, nanochemistry and water

treatment techniques will make better understanding of engineering processes and

applications for further learning.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Jain P.C. and Monica Jain, "Engineering Chemistry", Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P)

Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

2.

3.

Dara S.S, Umare S.S, "Engineering Chemistry", S. Chand & Company Ltd., New Delhi 2010.

Sivasankar B., "Engineering Chemistry", Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New

Delhi, 2008.

REFERENCES:

1. Ozin G. A. and Arsenault A. C., "Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials",

RSC Publishing, 2005.

2. B.R. Puri, L.R. Sharma, M.S. Pathania., "Principles of Physical Chemistry", Vishal Publishing

Company, 2008.

22

EE18151 BASIC ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING L T P C

(Common to AE, BT, CE, CS, IT, MR & ME) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To understand the basic theorems used in Electrical circuits and the principles of

measuring instruments.

To educate the different concepts and function of electrical machines.

To introduce the fundamentals of semiconductor and applications.

To explain the principles of digital electronics.

To impart knowledge of communication.

UNIT I ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS & MEASURMENTS 10

Ohm’s Law - Kirchhoff’s Laws - Steady State Solution of DC Circuits using Mesh Analysis -

Introduction to AC Circuits - Waveforms and RMS Value - Power and Power factor - Single Phase

and Three Phase AC Balanced Circuits. Construction and working Principle of Moving Coil and

Moving Iron Instruments (Ammeters and Voltmeters), Dynamometer type Watt meters and Energy

meters (Qualitative treatment only).

UNIT II ELECTRICAL MACHINES 10

Construction, Principle of Operation, Basic Equations and Applications of DC Generators, DC

Motors, Single phase induction Motor, Single Phase Transformer.

UNIT III SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND APPLICATIONS 9

Characteristics of PN Junction Diode - Zener Effect - Zener Diode - LED, Photo diode and its

Characteristics - Half wave and Full wave Rectifiers - Voltage Regulation. Bipolar Junction

Transistor - CB, CE, CC Configurations and Characteristics - Photo transistors.

UNIT IV DIGITAL ELECTRONICS 9

Binary Number System - Logic Gates - Boolean Algebra - Half and Full Adders - Flip-Flops -

Registers and Counters - A/D and D/A Conversion (single concepts).

UNIT V FUNDAMENTALS OF COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING 7

Types of Signals: Analog and Digital Signals - Modulation and Demodulation: Principles of

Amplitude and Frequency Modulations.

Communication Systems: Radio, TV, Fax, Microwave, Satellite and Optical Fiber (Block Diagram

Approach only)..

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

Study the fundamental laws governing electrical circuits and to describe the working of

measuring instruments.

Understand the construction and characteristics of different electrical machines.

Describe the fundamental behavior of different semiconductor devices and circuits.

Learn the fundamental concepts of digital electronics circuits.

Recognize the type of signals, data transfer and able to apply in communication systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mittle V.N, Arvind Mittal, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill(India), Second

Edition, 2013.

23

2. Sedha R.S., "A Text Book of Applied Electronics", S. Chand & Co., 2014.

REFERENCES:

1. Muthusubramanian R, Salivahanan S and Muraleedharan K A, "Basic Electrical, Electronics

Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill, 2013.

2. I.J. Nagrath and D.P. Kothari, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill ((India),

Third Edition, 2010.

3. Mehta V K, "Principles of Electronics", S. Chand & Company Ltd, 2010. 4.

5.

M. Morris Mano, "Digital Logic & Computer Engineering", Printice Hall of India, 2004.

Mahmood Nahvi and Joseph A. Edminister, "Electric Circuits", Schaum' Outline Series,

McGraw Hill, Fourth Edition, 2007.

24

GE18151 ENGINEERING DRAWING L T P C


OBJECTIVES:

This course will introduce students to Engineering Drawing and build their ability to

read drawings and interpret the position and form of simple geometry, culminating into

understanding of simple technical assemblies.

UNIT 0 ENGINEERING DRAWING FUNDAMENTALS (Not for

Examination)

5

Drawing standard: BIS, Lettering, Dimensioning, Type of lines, Conventions, Geometrical

constructions: Dividing a straight line into equal parts, Bisecting a given angle, Construction of

polygon - Triangle, Square, Pentagon and Hexagon using drawing tools.

UNIT I CURVES AND PROJECTION OF POINTS AND LINES 15

Construction of Engineering Curves: Conic Sections - Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola using

Eccentricity method, Cycloid, Involute of Circle and Pentagon.

Projection: Principal Planes, Projection of Points using Four Angles of Projection, Projection of

Straight Lines - Lines parallel or inclined to one or both planes using Rotating Line Method in

First Angle of Projection.

UNIT II PROJECTION OF PLANES AND SOLIDS 15

Projection of Plane Figures - Inclined to any one Principal Plane,

Projection of Solids - Simple Solids (Prisms, Pyramids, Cone and Cylinder) axis inclined to any

one Principal Plane.

UNIT III SECTION OR SOLIDS & DEVELOPMENT OF SURFACES 15

Section of Solids - Sectional views of simple vertical solids cut by section plane inclined to any

one Principal Plane.

Development of Surfaces - Development of lateral surfaces of truncated and frustum of simple

solids.

UNIT IV PICTORIAL PROJECTION 15

Introduction to Pictorial Projection, Isometric Projection - Principle, Isometric Planes, Isometric

Scales, Isometric Projection of simple solids and their combination.

Free Hand Drawing - Orthographic Projection - Orthographic views of simple blocks from their

Isometric view, Isometric view of simple blocks from their Orthographic views.

UNIT V PERSPECTIVE PROJECTION 10

Perspective Projection of full solids in simple positions with respect to projection planes by

visual ray and vanishing point method.

TOTAL: 75 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

On Completion of the course the student will be able to

Perform free hand sketching of basic geometrical constructions and multiple views of

objects.

25

Do orthographic projection of lines and plane surfaces.

Draw projections and solids and development of surfaces.

Prepare isometric and perspective sections of simple solids.

Demonstrate computer aided drafting.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bhatt N.D, Panchal Pramod V.M and Ingle R, "Engineering Drawing", Charotar Publishing

House, 2014.

REFERENCES:

1. Venugopal K and Prabhu Raja V, "Engineering Graphics", New Age International (P)

Limited, 2009.

2. Shah M.B and Rana B.C, "Engineering Drawing", Pearson Education, 2009.

3. Gopalakrishna K.R, "Engineering Drawing" (Vol. I & II), Subhas Publications, 2010. 4.

5.

Natrajan K.V, "A Textbook of Engineering Graphics", Dhanalakshmi Publishers,

Chennai, 2006.

Gowri S and Jeyapoovan T, "Engineering Graphics", Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd.,

2011.

26

PC18161 PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY LABORATORY L T P C


PHYSICS LABORATORY

OBJECTIVES:

To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of various physical

properties of materials.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 5 experiments to be conducted):

1. Determination of compressibility of the liquid - Ultrasonic interferometer.

2. Determination of thickness of the given object by Air wedge method.

3. Determination of dispersive power of a prism by Spectrometer.

4. Determination of Young’s modulus of wooden scale by Non-Uniform bending.

5. Determination of wavelength, particle size and numerical aperture of fibre using Lasers.

6. Lee’s Disc – Thermal conductivity of the poor conductor.

7. Torsional Pendulum – Determination of Rigidity modulus and moment of inertia.

OUTCOMES:

The student will be able to analyze the physical principle using the various instruments,

also relate the principle to engineering applications.

The various experiments in the areas of optics, mechanics and thermal physics will

nurture the students in all branches of Engineering.

The students will be able to think innovatively and also improve the creative skills that

are essential for engineering.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS:

Spectrometer, Mercury Vapour lamp, Lee’s disc experimental setup, Travelling microscope,

Ultrasonic interferometer, Sodium vapour lamp, Diode laser, Optical fiber kit.

CHEMISTRY LABORATORY

OBJECTIVES:

To make the student to acquire practical skills in the determination of water quality

parameters through volumetric and instrumental analysis.

To acquaint the students with the determination of molecular weight of a polymer by

viscometery.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS (Any 5 experiments to be conducted):

1. Determination of total, temporary & permanent hardness of water by EDTA method.

2. Estimation of copper by EDTA.

3. Conductometric titration of a strong acid with a strong base

4. Estimation of iron content of the given solution using potentiometer.

27

5. Estimation of iron content of the water sample using spectrophotometer.

6. Determination of molecular weight of polymer using viscometer.

7. Determination of Alkalinity in water.

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

The students will be equipped with hands-on knowledge in the quantitative chemical

analysis of water quality related parameters.

1. Conductivity meter - 10 Nos

2. Spectrophotometer - 10 Nos

3. Ostwald Viscometer - 10 Nos

4. Potentiometer - 10 Nos

5. Electronic Balance - 2 Nos

Common Apparatus: Pipette, Burette, conical flask, iodine flask, porcelain tile, dropper (each 30

Nos.)

REFERENCES:

1.

2.

Rajendran V, "Engineering Physics", Tata McGraw Hill, 2009.

Furniss B.S. Hannaford A.J, Smith P.W.G and Tatchel A.R., "Vogels Textbook of

Practical Organic Chemistry", 8th Edition, LBS Singapore, 2014

28

GE18161 ENGINEERING PRACTICES LABORATORY L T P C

(Common to all Branches) 0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:

To provide exposure to the students with hands on experience on various basic engineering

practices in Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Electronics Engineering.

LIST OF EXPERIEMNTS

GROUP A (CIVIL & MECHANICAL)

I CIVIL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

Buildings:

(a) Study of plumbing and carpentry components of residential and industrial

buildings. Safety aspects.

Plumbing Works:

a) Study of pipeline joints, its location and functions: valves, taps, couplings,

unions, reducers, elbows in household fittings.

b) Study of pipe connections requirements for pumps and turbines.

c) Preparation of plumbing line sketches for water supply and sewage works.

d) Hands-on-exercise:

Basic pipe connections - Mixed pipe material connection - Pipe connections with

different joining components.

e) Demonstration of plumbing requirements of high-rise buildings.

Carpentry using Power Tools only:

a) Study of the joints in roofs, doors, windows and furniture.

b) Hands-on-exercise:

Wood work, joints by sawing, planning and cutting.

II MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

Welding:

a) Preparation of arc welding of butt joints, lap joints and tee joints.

b) Gas welding practice

Basic Machining:

a) Simple Turning and Taper turning

b) Drilling Practice

Sheet Metal Work:

a) Forming & Bending:

b) Model making – Trays, funnels, etc.

c) Different type of joints.

Machine assembly practice:

a) Study of centrifugal pump

b) Study of air conditioner

Demonstration on:

29

a) Smithy operations, upsetting, swaging, setting down and bending.

Example – Exercise – Production of hexagonal headed bolt.

b) Foundry operations like mould preparation for gear and step cone pulley.

c) Fitting – Exercises – Preparation of square fitting and vee – fitting models.

GROUP B (ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS)

III ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PRACTICE

1. Residential house wiring using switches, fuse, indicator, lamp and energy meter

2. Fluorescent lamp wiring.

3. Stair case wiring

4. Measurement of electrical quantities – voltage, current, power & power factor in

RLC circuit.

5. Measurement and comparison of energy for resistive and LED load using single phase

energy meter.

6. Measurement of resistance to earth of an electrical equipment.

IV ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING PRACTICE

1. Identification of circuit components

a) Resistor, capacitor, diode (PN & Zener),transistors.

b) Soldering practice – Circuits – Using general purpose PCB.

2. Evaluating the parameters for DC power supply and AC power supply (peak-peak,

rms, average, period, frequency) using function generator and CRO.

3. Study and implementation of logic functions using NAND, NOR, and NOT gates.

4. VI Characteristics of PN Junction diode.

5. VI Characteristics of Solar photovoltaic panel.

6. Design a 5V/12V Regulated Power Supply: using FWR rectifier and

IC7805/IC7812.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

Fabricate carpentry components and to lay pipe connections including plumbing works.

Use welding equipments to join the structures.

Wiring of basic electrical system and measurement of electrical parameters.

Study and implementation of basic electronic components, circuits and solar photovoltaic

panel.

Design a basic regulated power supply.

REFERENCES:

1. Jeyachandran K., Natarajan S. & Balasubramanian S., "A Primer on Engineering Practices

Laboratory", Anuradha Publications, 2007.

2. Jeyapoovan T., Saravanapandian M. & Pranitha S., "Engineering Practices Lab Manual",

Vikas Puplishing House Pvt.Ltd, 2006.

3. Bawa H.S., "Workshop Practice", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, 2007.

30

4. Rajendra Prasad A. and Sarma P.M.M.S., "Workshop Practice", Sree Sai Publication,

2002.

5.

6.

7.

Kannaiah P. & Narayana K.L., "Manual on Workshop Practice", Scitech Publications,

1999.

Mittle V.N, Arvind Mittal, "Basic Electrical Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill(India),

Second Edition,2013.

Sedha R.S., "A Text Book of Applied Electronics", S. Chand & Co., 2014.


S. No. Description of Equipment Qty

CIVIL

1. Assorted components for plumbing consisting of metallic

pipes, plastic pipes, flexible pipes, couplings, unions,

elbows, plugs and other fittings.

15 Sets.

2. Carpentry vice (fitted to work bench) 15 Nos.

3. Standard woodworking tools 15 Sets.

4. Models of industrial trusses, door joints, furniture joints 5 each

5. Power Tools: (a) Rotary Hammer

(b) Demolition Hammer

(c) Circular Saw

(d) Planer

(e) Hand Drilling Machine

(f) Jigsaw

2 Nos

MECHANICAL

1. Arc welding transformer with cables and holders 5 Nos.

2. Welding booth with exhaust facility 5 Nos.

3. Welding accessories like welding shield, chipping

hammer, wire brush, etc. 5 Sets.

4. Oxygen and acetylene gas cylinders, blow pipe and other

welding outfit. 2 Nos.

5. Centre lathe 2 Nos.

6. Hearth furnace, anvil and smithy tools 2 Sets.

7. Moulding table, foundry tools 2 Sets.

8. Power Tool: Angle Grinder 2 Nos

9. Study-purpose items: centrifugal pump, air-conditioner 1 each

ELECTRICAL

1. Assorted electrical components for house wiring 15 Sets

2. Electrical measuring instruments 10 Sets

3. Study purpose items: Iron box, fan and regulator,

emergency lamp 1 each

4. Megger (250V/500V) 1 No.

5. Power Tools: (a) Range Finder 2 Nos (b) Digital Live-

wire detector 2 Nos.

6. LED lamp 8 W & 16 W 2 Nos. each

31

ELECTRONICS

1. Soldering guns 10 Nos.

2. Assorted electronic components for making circuits 50 Nos.

3. Small PCBs 10 Nos.

4. Multimeters 10 Nos.

5. Study purpose ICs: IC7805/IC7812 1 each

6. Photovoltaic panel: 5 W/10 W 2 Nos.

7. Light Source for PV panel 1 No.

32

SEMESTER- II

HS18251 TECHNICAL ENGLISH L T P C


OBJECTIVES:

To enable learners to define and understand technical communication and scientific writing

To expose learners to nuances of seminar presentation, group discussion, and public

speaking

To expose learners to writing for scientific purposes

To expose learners to drafting correspondences for business purposes

To expose learners to writing for documenting purposes

To enable students to have a holistic understanding of job interviews and recruiting

process.

UNIT I 9

Listening - AV files pertaining to manufacturing processes of products, scientific documentaries;

Speaking - syllable division and word stress, intonation, sharing opinions; Reading - news articles

related to science and technology; Writing - definitions, instruction, recommendation, data

interpretation, resume; Grammar - tenses and their aspects, sentence connectors - discourse

markers, sequential words, active and passive voice, subject-verb agreement.

UNIT II 9

Listening - AV pertaining to marketing strategies, peer reading and pronunciation; Speaking -

turn taking, sharing opinions; conducting and attending a meeting, understanding the nuances of

spoken communication among internal audience and external audience; Reading - analytical

documents, descriptive documents; Writing - fliers, brochures, resume - letter of application,

checklists; Grammar - modal verbs, clauses - types and uses, conditional clauses, articles.

UNIT III 9

Listening - AV related to how to use components, scientific description, Speaking - speaking for

motivation and initiation, speaking at a seminar presentation; Reading - scientific journals,

papers; Writing - Technical descriptions - process description, purpose and function, PowerPoint,

Google forms, user manuals; Grammar - phrasal verbs, prepositions, technical and scientific

affixes.

UNIT IV 9

Listening - scientific debates, crisis management; Speaking - handling conflicts, speaking about

the loss of benefits, progress or decline of business, identifying the connotative meanings,

Reading- documented evidences of uses and functions of a product, review of a product, Writing

- memos, follow-up letters, reports - proposal, project, progress reports, sales reports, reports on

industrial visits, executive summary. Grammar - reported speech and tag questions, sentence

structure - comparative, imperative, cause and effect, infinitive of result.

UNIT V 9

Listening - AV of Group discussions, panel discussions, face to face interviews for recruitment

purposes; Speaking- speaking at group discussions, interviewing a personality, answering at the

interviews; Reading - WebPages of topnotch engineering companies, Writing - blogging, e-mails,

letter of complaint, minutes of the meeting; Grammar - one word substitution, collocations,

better word/sentence substitution (rephrasing the content/improvising ideas).

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

33

Suggested Activities [task based] - case study, guest lectures as models, problem solving,

understanding team work.

Assessment:

3 Continuous assessments (reading, writing, grammar, and 3 assignments (1 assignment

focuses on listening 2 assignments focus on speaking, evaluation of students’ speeches and

recorded clippings)

OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, learners will be able to

understand the nuances of technical communication and scientific writing

present papers and give seminars

discuss in groups and brainstorm

draft business correspondences and write for documenting purposes

face job interviews with confidence

REFERENCES:

1. Department of English, Anna University. Mindscapes : English for Technologists and

Engineers. Orient Blackswan, Chennai. 2012.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Downes, Colm, Cambridge English for Job-hunting, Cambridge University Press, New Delhi.

2008.

Murphy, Raymond, Intermediate English Grammar with Answers, Cambridge University

Press 2000.

Thomson, A.J., "Practical English Grammar 1 & 2", Oxford, 1986.

Herbert A J, "The Structure of Technical English", Longman, 1965.

Websites

1. http://www.usingenglish.com

2. http://www.uefap.com3

3. https://owl.english.purdue.edu/owl/

4. www.learnenglishfeelgood.com/esl-printables-worksheets.html

Software

1. Face2Face Advance – Cambridge University Press, 2014

2. English Advance Vocabulary- Cambridge University Press

3. IELTS test preparation – Cambridge University Press 2017

4. Official Guide to the TOEFL Test With CD-ROM, 4th Edition

5 . CAMBRIDGE Preparation for the TOEFL TEST- Cambridge University Press, 2017

34

MA18251 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS II L T P C


OBJECTIVES:

• To acquaint the student with the concepts of vector calculus needed for problems in all

engineering disciplines.

• To make the student acquire sound knowledge of techniques in solving ordinary

differential equations that model engineering problems.

• To develop an understanding of the standard techniques of complex variable theory so as to

enable the student to apply them with confidence in application areas such as heat conduction,

elasticity, fluid dynamics and flow of electric current.

To make the student appreciate the purpose of using transforms to create a new domain

in which it is easier to handle the problem that is being investigated.

UNIT I VECTOR CALCULUS 12

Gradient, divergence and curl - Directional derivative - Irrotational and solenoidal vector fields -

Vector integration - Green’s theorem in a plane, Gauss divergence theorem and Stokes’ theorem

(excluding proofs) - Simple applications involving cubes and rectangular parallelopipeds.

UNIT II ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 12

Higher order linear differential equations with constant coefficients - Method of variation of

parameters - Cauchy’s and Legendre’s linear equations - Simultaneous first order linear equations

with constant coefficients.

UNIT III LAPLACE TRANSFORM 12

Laplace transform - Sufficient condition for existence - Transform of elementary functions - Basic

properties - Transforms of derivatives and integrals of functions - Derivatives and integrals of

transforms - Transforms of unit step function and impulse functions - Transform of periodic

functions. Inverse Laplace transforms -Statement of Convolution theorem - Initial and final value

theorems - Solution of linear ODE of second order with constant coefficients using Laplace

transformation techniques.

UNIT IV ANALYTIC FUNCTION 12

Functions of a complex variable - Analytic functions: Necessary conditions - Cauchy-Riemann

equations and sufficient conditions (excluding proofs) - Harmonic and orthogonal properties of

analytic function - Harmonic conjugate - Construction of analytic functions - Conformal mapping -

Translation, rotation and inversion (w = z+c, cz, 1/z, z2) - Bilinear transformation.

UNIT V COMPLEX INTEGRATION 12

Complex integration - Statement and applications of Cauchy’s integral theorem and Cauchy’s

integral formula - Taylor’s and Laurent’s series expansions - Singular points - Residues - Cauchy’s

residue theorem - Evaluation of real definite integrals as contour integrals around unit circle and

semi-circle (excluding poles on the real axis).

TOTAL (L:45 + T:15) : 60 PERIODS

35

OUTCOMES:

The subject helps the student to develop the fundamental and basic concepts in vector

calculus, ODE, Laplace Transforms and complex functions. Students will be able to solve

problems related to engineering applications by using these techniques.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 8th Edition, John Wiley, 1999.

2.

3.

Bali N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Text book of Engineering Mathematics", Eighth Edition,

Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2011.

Grewal. B.S, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 41st Edition, Khanna Publications, Delhi,

2011.

REFERENCES:

1. Dass, H.K., and Er. Rajnish Verma, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", S.Chand Private Ltd.,

2011.

2. Glyn James, "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 3rd Edition, Pearson Education,

2012.

3. Peter V.O’Neil, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 7th Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012. 4.

5.

Ramana B.V, "Higher Engineering Mathematics", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company,

New Delhi, 2008.

Sivarama Krishna Das P. and Rukmangadachari E., "Engineering Mathematics", Volume I,

Second Edition, Pearson Publishing, 2011.

36

IT18101 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING L T P C


OBJECTIVES:

The students should be made to:

Learn the organization of a digital computer.

Learn to think logically and write algorithms or draw flow charts for problems.

Be exposed to the syntax of C.

Be familiar with programming in C.

Learn to use arrays, strings, functions, pointers, structures and unions in C.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PROBLEM SOLVING 9

Simple model of a Computer - Hardware - Software - Data Representation, Introduction to

Computer Networks and Internet, Problem Solving Techniques - Bottom up design and top down

design - applications, Introduction to Algorithms and Flow Chart.

UNIT II C PROGRAMMING BASICS 9

Introduction to ‘C’ programming - structure of a ‘C’ program - compilation and linking processes.

Conversion of simple algorithm to program.

Constants, Variables - Data Types - Expressions using operators in ‘C’ - Managing Input and

Output operations - Decision Making and Branching - Looping statements - solving simple

scientific and statistical problems.

UNIT III ARRAYS AND STRINGS 9

Arrays - Initialization - Declaration - One dimensional and Two dimensional arrays - String- String

operations - Arrays of strings.

UNIT IV FUNCTIONS AND USER DEFINED DATA TYPES 9

Function - definition of function - Declaration of function - Pass by value - Pass by reference -

Recursion - Enumerators - Structures - Unions.

UNIT V POINTERS AND FILES 9

Macros - storage classes - Pointers - Definition - Initialization - Pointers arithmetic - Double

Pointers, Basic file operations - Example problems.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, the student should be able to:

Design and represent solutions to problems as algorithm and flow chart

Write simple C Programs

Develop modularized applications in C.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Pradip Dey and Manas Ghosh, "Programming in C", First Edition, Oxford University Press,

2018.

2. Byron S Gottfried, "Programming with C", Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-

Hill, 2010.

37

REFERENCES:

1. Kernighan B.W and Ritchie D.M, "The C Programming Language", Second Edition, Pearson

Education, 2015.

2. Yashavant P. Kanetkar, "Let Us C", BPB Publications, 2011.

3. Paul J Deitel and Harvey M. Deitel, "C How to Program", Seventh Edition, Pearson

Education, 2016.

38

GE18251 ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING L T P C


OBJECTIVES:

To study the nature and facts about environment.

To study the interrelationship between living organism and environment.

To implement scientific, technological, economic and political solutions to environmental

problems.

To study the integrated themes and biodiversity, natural resources, pollution control and

waste management..

UNIT I ENVIRONMENT, ECOSYSTEMS AND BIODIVERSITY 12

Definition, scope and importance of environment - need for public awareness - concept of an

ecosystem - structure and function of an ecosystem - energy flow in the ecosystem - ecological

succession - food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids - Introduction, types, characteristic

features, structure and function of the forest ecosystem, grassland ecosystem, desert ecosystem,

aquatic ecosystems, Introduction to biodiversity definition: genetic, species and ecosystem

diversity - biogeographical classification of India - value of biodiversity - Biodiversity at global,

national and local levels - India as a mega-diversity nation - hot-spots of biodiversity - threats to

biodiversity - man-wildlife conflicts - endangered and endemic species of India - conservation of

biodiversity: In-situ and ex-situ conservation of biodiversity.

UNIT II NATURAL RESOURCES 10

Forest resources: Use and over-exploitation, deforestation, case studies- timber extraction, mining,

dams and their effects on forests and tribal people - Water resources: Use and over - utilization of

surface and ground water, floods, drought, conflicts over water, dams - benefits and problems -

Mineral resources: Use and exploitation, environmental effects of extracting and using mineral

resources, case studies - Food resources: World food problems, changes caused by agriculture and

overgrazing, effects of modern agriculture, fertilizer - pesticide problems, water logging, salinity,

case studies - Energy resources: Growing energy needs, renewable and non renewable energy

sources, use of alternate energy sources. case studies - Land resources: Land as a resource - role of

an individual in conservation of natural resources - Equitable use of resources for sustainable

lifestyles.

UNIT III ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND DISASTER MANAGEMENT 10

Definition - causes, effects and control measures Air pollution, Water pollution, Soil pollution,

Marine pollution, Noise pollution, Thermal pollution, Nuclear hazards - solid waste management:

causes, effects and control measures of municipal solid wastes, e-Waste, risk related to e-Waste -

role of an individual in prevention of pollution - pollution case studies - disaster management:

floods, earthquake, cyclone and landslides, land degradation, man induced landslides, soil erosion

and desertification.

UNIT IV SOCIAL ISSUES AND THE ENVIRONMENT 7

From unsustainable to sustainable development - urban problems related to energy - water

conservation, rain water harvesting, watershed management - resettlement and rehabilitation of

people; its problems and concerns, case studies - role of non-governmental organization-

environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions - Principles of green chemistry, climate

change, global warming, acid rain, ozone layer depletion, nuclear accidents and holocaust, case

studies - wasteland reclamation - consumerism and waste products - Environment protection act -

39

Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) act - Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) act -

Wildlife protection act - Forest conservation act - central and state pollution control boards -

Public awareness.

UNIT V HUMAN POPULATION AND THE ENVIRONMENT 6

Population growth, variation among nations - population explosion - family welfare programme -

environment and human health - human rights - value education - HIV / AIDS, Swine flu, Dengue

fever - women and child welfare - role of information technology in environment and human

health management - case studies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

On completion of the course, the student will be able to

Solve problems that cannot be solved by mere environmental laws.

Acquire awareness on environmental issues at their infant stage.

Integrate facts, concepts and methods for multiple disciplines and apply them to solve

environmental and social problems.

Analyse the connectivity between manmade activities - pollution - environmental issues -

social problem and provide eco-friendly solutions.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Benny Joseph, "Environmental Science and Engineering", Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi,

2012.

2. Gilbert M.Masters, "Introduction to Environmental Engineering and Science", 2nd edition,

Pearson Education, 2010.

REFERENCES:

1. Dharmendra S. Sengar, "Environmental law", Prentice hall of India PVT LTD, New Delhi,

2012.

2. Erach Bharucha, "Textbook of Environmental Studies", Universities Press(I) PVT, LTD,

Hydrabad, 2015.

3. Rajagopalan, R, "Environmental Studies - From Crisis to Cure", Oxford University Press,

2011. 4. Tyler Miller. G and Scott E. Spoolman, "Environmental Science", Cengage Learning India

PVT, LTD, Delhi, 2013.

40

ME18201 ENGINEERING MECHANICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To understand the concept of equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies.

To understand the concept of first and second moment of area.

To understand the concept of various types of frictions.

To understand the principle of work energy method, Newton’s law and impact of elastic

bodies.

UNIT I BASICS AND STATICS OF PARTICLES 9

Introduction - Units and Dimensions - Laws of Mechanics - Principle of transmissibility -

Parallelogram and triangular Law of forces - Vectorial representation of forces - Vector operations

of forces - additions, subtraction, dot product, cross product - Coplanar Forces - rectangular

components - Equilibrium of a particle - Lami’s theorem - Forces in space - Equilibrium of a

particle in space - Equivalent systems of forces.

UNIT II STATICS OF RIGID BODIES AND ANALYSIS OF

STRUCTURES

9

STATICS OF RIGID BODIES: External, Internal forces - moment of a force - varignon‘s

theorem - moment of a couple - resolution of a force into a force and a couple - reduction of a

system of forces - reactions at supports and connections - equilibrium of a two and three force

bodies - case studies.

ANALYSIS OF STRUCTURES: Simple trusses - Method of joints, method of sections - joints

under special loading conditions - space trusses - analysis of frames.

UNIT III CENTROID, CENTRE OF GRAVITY AND MOMENT OF INERTIA 9

Centroids of areas, composite areas, Theorems of Pappus and Guldinus- Parallel axis theorem and

perpendicular axis theorem - determination of moment of inertia of plane figures, polar moment of

inertia-radius of gyration - mass moment of inertia of simple solids.

UNIT IV DYNAMICS OF PARTICLES 9

KINEMATICS: Introduction-plane, rectilinear and rotary motion-time dependent motion -

rectangular coordinates - projectile motion.

KINETICS: Equation of motion - rectilinear and rotary motion - Newton‘s II law - D‘Alembert‘s

principle - Energy - potential energy - kinetic energy - conservation of energy - work done by a

force - work energy method.

IMPULSE AND MOMENTUM: Concept of conservation of momentum - Impulse-Momentum

principle - Impact - Direct central impact, oblique central impact, impact of a moving train on the

spring board.

UNIT V FRICTION 9

FRICTION: Laws of dry friction - angles of friction-coefficient of static and kinetic friction -

wedges - surface contact friction - belt friction - journal bearings - axle friction - thrust bearings -

disc friction - Point contact friction - wheel friction - rolling resistance - case studies.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

41

Students will be able to

Explain the concept of equilibrium of particles and rigid bodies.

Apply the concepts of equilibrium and moment of inertia for various shapes sections.

Make use of various concepts of friction in applications like Bearings, clutches etc.

Solve problems using the concepts in kinematics and kinetics.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Beer F.P and Johnston Jr. E.R, "Vector Mechanics for Engineers (In SI Units): Statics and

Dynamics", Eighth Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, New Delhi, 2004.

2. Rajasekaran S and Sankarasubramanian G, "Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics",

3rd Edition, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2005.

REFERENCES:

1. Bhavikatti S.S and Rajashekarappa, K.G, "Engineering Mechanics", New Age International

(P) Limited Publishers, 2005.

2. Hibbeller R.C and Ashok Gupta, "Engineering Mechanics: Statics and Dynamics", 11th

Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.

3. Irving H. Shames and Krishna Mohana Rao G., "Engineering Mechanics - Statics and

Dynamics", 4th Edition, Pearson Education, 2006. 4.

5.

Meriam J.L and Kraige L.G, "Engineering Mechanics - Statics - Volume 1, Dynamics Volume

2", Third Edition, John Wiley & Sons,1993.

Vela Murali, "Engineering Mechanics", Oxford University Press, 2010.

42

PH18253 MATERIAL SCIENCE L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To review physics and chemistry in the context of materials science.

Give an introduction to the relation between structure and properties.

Give an introduction to advanced engineering materials in the context of a composition,

properties and applications.

UNIT I THERMAL & MAGNETIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 9

Introduction - coefficient of thermal expansion, thermal stresses. Applications-bimetallic strip,

thermal insulation, thermal shock resistance, tempered glass, cryogenic materials.

Ferro and ferri magnetic materials - properties. Heisenberg and domain theory of ferromagnetism.

Hysteresis. Curie-Weiss law. Hard and soft magnetic materials and their applications,

antiferromagnetic materials - Ferrites and its applications.

UNIT II CONDUCTING & SUPERCONDUCTING MATERIALS 10

Conductors - classical free electron theory of metals - Electrical and thermal conductivity -

Wiedemann - Franz law - Lorentz number - Draw backs of classical theory - Quantum theory -

Fermi distribution function - Effect of temperature on Fermi Function - Density of energy states -

carrier concentration in metals.

Superconductivity - properties - Type I and Type II superconductors - BCS theory of

superconductivity (Qualitative) - High Tc superconductors - Applications of superconductors.

UNIT III SEMICONDUCTING MATERIALS AND DEVICES 8

Elemental and compound semiconductors. Intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors - properties.

Carrier concentration in intrinsic semiconductors. Carrier concentration in n-type and p-type

semiconductors. Material preparation - Czochralski’s technique and zone refining technique. Hall

effect - Hall coefficient in extrinsic semiconductors, experimental determination of Hall

coefficient. Application of Hall effect. Semiconductor devices - LDR, LED, Photodiode, Solar

Cells and LCD.

UNIT IV DIELECTRIC PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS 8

Introduction to dielectric materials - Dielectric constant - Polarization of dielectric materials -

Types of Polarization (Polarizability) - Equation of internal fields in solid ( One- Dimensional)

(Derivation) - Claussius - Mosotti Relation for elemental dielectric materials - Dielectric

Breakdown - Frequency dependence of dielectric constant, Dielectric Losses - Important

applications of dielectric material.

UNIT V ADVANCED ENGINEERING MATERIALS 10

Shape memory alloys (SMA) - Characteristics, properties of NiTi alloy, advantages, disadvantages

& applications. Nanomaterials - Preparation - pulsed laser deposition - chemical vapour deposition

- Applications - Nonlinear Optical (NLO) materials - Applications - Birefringence - optical Kerr

effect - Classification of Biomaterials and its applications. Metallic glasses - preparation,

properties, applications.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

43

OUTCOMES:

After the completion this course students will be able to

recognize the thermal and magnetic properties of materials.

distinguish conducting, semiconducting & super conducting materials.

have the exposure of the dielectric properties and material and it’s applications.

analyse the requirements of advanced materials for different applications.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Arumugam. M, "Materials Science", Anuradha Publications, 2015. 2.

Rajendran. V, "Engineering Physics", Tata McGraw Hill, 2015.

REFERENCES:

1. Gaur. R.K and Gupta. S.L, "Engineering Physics", Dhanpat Publications, 2015.

2. Avadhnaulu. M.N and Kshirsagar, "A Textbook of Engineering Physics", S. Chand & Co.,

2006.

3. Kittlel. C, "Introduction to Solid State Physics", 7th Edition, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2004.

4.

5.

Azaroff. L.V and Brophy. J.J, "Electronic Processes In Materials", McGraw Hill., 1963.

James F Shackelford and Madanapalli K Muralidhara, "Introduction to Materials Science for

Engineers", Sixth Edition, Pearson Education, 2010.

44

IT18111 PROGRAMMING FOR PROBLEM SOLVING

LABORATORY

(Common to all Branches Except MR)

L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:

The students should be made to

Be exposed to the syntax of C.

Be familiar with programming in C.

Learn to use arrays, strings, functions, pointers, structures and unions in C.

.

LIST OF EXERCISES

1. Usage of Basic Linux commands

2. C Programming using Simple statements and expressions

3. Scientific problem solving using decision making and looping

4. Simple programming for one dimensional and two dimensional arrays

5. Solving problems using Strings

6. C Programming using Pointers

7. C Programming using user defined functions (Pass by value and Pass by reference)

8. C Programming using Recursion

9. C Programming using structures and union

10. C Programming using enumerated data types

11. C Programming using macros and storage classes

12. C Programming using Files

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

At the end of the course, the student should be able to

Write simple C Programs

Able to solve scientific problems using C.

REFERENCES:

1. Pradip Dey and Manas Ghosh, "Programming in C", First Edition, Oxford University Press,

2018.

2. Byron S Gottfried, "Programming with C", Schaum’s Outlines, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-

Hill, 2010.

LIST OF EQUIPMENT FOR A BATCH OF 30 STUDENTS

S. No. Description of Equipment Qty

HARDWARE:

1. Computer 30

SOFTWARE:

2. Open Source Linux OS 30

3. C compiler 30

45

ME18211 MACHINE DRAWING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:

To introduce the concept of 2D drafting using CAD packages.

To improve communications through documentation and to create a database for

manufacturing.

To introduce students the basics and standards of drawing related to machines and

components.

I

II

III

IV

INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER AIDED DRAFTING

Introduction to Computer Aided Drafting hardware - Overview of application software - 2D

drafting commands like Layers, Block, Insert (Auto CAD) for simple shapes - Dimensioning.

CONVENTIONS, ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS

BIS codes for Engineering Drawing - Abbreviations - Conventional representation of standard

components - Systems of dimensioning and dimensioning of common components - surface

finish, symbols and representing surface finish on drawing - sectioning conventions -

Representation of welded joints, riveted joints and screw threads.

GEOMETRIC DIMENSIONING, FITS AND TOLERANCES

Description of tolerances and grades - types of fits and their description - hole basis system-

selection of fits from standard tables - fits for different applications - examples - geometrical

tolerances- surface finish conventions.

PREPARATION OF ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS

Cotter joint, knuckle joint, flange coupling, universal coupling, foot step bearing, plummer

block, connecting rod ends, cross heads, screw jack, lathe tailstock, stop valves, non-return

valve.

Note: Plotting of drawings must be made for each exercise and attached to the records written by

students.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

The students will be able to read and interpret the production drawings.

The students will be able to select and apply proper fits and tolerances.

The students will be able to generate assembly drawings for various mechanical products.

REFERENCES:

1. Gopalakrishna K.R., "Machine Drawing, Subhas Publishers", Bangalore, 2013.

2. Bhatt.N.D, "Machine Drawing", Chorotar Publishing House, 2011.

3. Sham Tickoo, "AutoCAD 2017: A Problem-Solving Approach, Basic and Intermediate", 23rd

Edition, 2017.

4. James D. Bethune Boston University, "Engineering Graphics with AutoCAD 2002", Pearson

Education, 2005.

5.

6.

Alan Kalameja, "AutoCAD 2008: A tutor for Engineering Graphics", Auto Desk Press, 2007.

https://thesourcecad.com/autocad-tutorials/

46


S.No. Description of Equipment Qty

HARDWARE:

1. Computer Server 1

2. Computer nodes or systems (High end CPU with atleast 1

GB main memory) networked to the server

30

3. A3 size plotter 1

4. Laser Printer 1

SOFTWARE:

5. Licensed software for Drafting and Modeling 30 licenses

6. Licensed operating system Adequate

47

SEMESTER - III

MA18351 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS III L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES:

To introduce Fourier series analysis this is central to many applications in engineering apart from

its uses in solving boundary value problems.

To understand the basic concepts of the Fourier transform techniques and its application in

Engineering.

To introduce the effective mathematical tools for the solutions of partial differential

equations that model several physical processes and to develop Z transform techniques for

discrete time systems.

UNIT I PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS 9+3

Formation of partial differential equations – Singular integrals - Solutions of standard types of first

order partial differential equations - Lagrange’s linear equation – Linear homogeneous partial

differential equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients

9+3

UNIT II FOURIER SERIES

Dirichlet’s conditions – General Fourier series – Odd and even functions – Half range sine series –

Half range cosine series –Parseval’s identity – Harmonic analysis.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS OF PARTIAL DIFFERENTIAL

EQUATIONS

9+3

Classification of PDE – Method of separation of variables - Solution of one dimensional wave

equation – One dimensional equation of heat conduction – Steady state solution of two

dimensional equation of heat conduction (excluding insulated edges).

UNIT IV FOURIER TRANSFORMS 9+3

Statement of Fourier integral theorem – Fourier transform pair – Fourier sine and cosine

transforms – Properties – Transforms of simple functions – Convolution theorem – Parseval’s

identity

UNIT V TRANSFORMS AND DIFFERENCE EQUATIONS 9+3

Z- transforms - Elementary properties – Inverse Z - transform (using partial fraction, long division

method and residue technique) –Convolution theorem - Formation of difference equations –

Solution of difference equations using Z - transform.

TOTAL: (L45 + T:15): 60PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

The understanding of the mathematical principles on transforms and partial differential equations

would provide them the ability to formulate and solve some of the physical problems of

engineering.

48

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Erwin Kreyszig, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics", 10th Edition, Wiley India, 2011.

2. Grewal. B.S., "Higher Engineering Mathematics", 42nd Edition, Khanna Publishers, Delhi,

2012.

3. Narayanan.S., Manicavachagom Pillay.T.K and Ramanaiah. G "Advanced Mathematics for

Engineering Students" Vol. II & III, S.Viswanathan Publishers Pvt. Ltd.1998.

REFERENCES:

1. Bali.N.P and Manish Goyal, "A Textbook of Engineering Mathematics", 7th Edition, Laxmi

Publications Pvt Ltd, 2007.

2. Glyn James, "Advanced Modern Engineering Mathematics", 4th Edition, Pearson Education,

2011.

3. Ray Wylie. C and Barrett.L.C, "Advanced Engineering Mathematics" Tata McGraw Hill

Education Pvt Ltd, Sixth Edition, New Delhi, 2012.

4. Peter V.O’Neil, “Advanced Engineering Mathematics”, Cengage Learning Indiapvt. Ltd.

7th Edition, New Delhi, 2012.

5. Veerarajan. T., “Transforms and Partial Differential Equation”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Company Limited, New Delhi, 2012

49

ME 18301 ENGINEERING THERMODYNAMICS L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES :

To familiarize the students to understand the fundamentals of thermodynamics and to

perform thermal analysis on their behavior and performance. (Use of Standard and approved Steam Table, Mollier Chart, Compressibility Chart)

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND FIRST LAW 12

Basic concepts -concept of continuum, comparison of microscopic and macroscopic approach.

Path and point functions. Intensive and extensive properties, total and specific quantities. System

and their types. Thermodynamic Equilibrium, State, path and process. Quasi-static, reversible

and irreversible processes. Heat and work transfer, definition and comparison, sign convention.

Displacement work and other modes of work, P-V diagram. Zeroth law of thermodynamics–

concept of temperature and thermal equilibrium–relationship between temperature scales –new

temperature scales. First law of thermodynamics–application to non-flow and steady systems–

unsteady flow processes (Descriptive only).

UNIT II SECOND LAW AND AVAILABILITY ANALYSIS 12

Heat reservoirs -source and sink. Heat Engine, Refrigerator, Heat pump. Statements of second

law and its corollaries. Carnot and reversed Carnot cycles – Performance. Clausius inequality.

Concept of entropy, T-s diagram, Tds Equations Entropy change for ideal gases-different

processes, principle of increase in entropy. Applications of Second Law. High and low grade

energy. Available and unavailable energy. Exergy and Irreversibility (Descriptive Only). First

law and second law Efficiency

UNIT III PROPERTIES OF PURE SUBSTANCE 12

Formation of steam and its thermodynamic properties, p-v, p-T, T-v, T-s, h-s diagrams. p-v-T

surface. Use of Steam Table and Mollier Chart. Determination of dryness fraction. Application

of First and Second law for pure substances. Ideal and actual Rankine cycles, Cycle

improvement methods-Reheat and Regenerative cycles.

UNIT IV IDEAL AND REAL GASES, THERMODYNAMIC RELATIONS 12

Properties of Ideal gas -Ideal and real gas comparison-Equations of state for ideal and real gases-

Reduced properties-Compressibility factor-Principle of Corresponding states-Simple

Calculations using Generalised Compressibility Chart. Maxwell relations, Tds Equations,

Difference and ratio of heat capacities, Energy equation, Joule-Thomson Coefficient, Clausius

Clapeyron equation, Phase Change Processes.

UNIT V GAS MIXTURES AND PSYCHROMETRY 12

Mole and Mass fraction, Dalton's and Amagat's Law. Properties of gas mixture–Molar mass, gas

constant, density, change in internal energy, enthalpy, entropy and Gibbs function.

Psychrometric properties, Psychrometric charts. Property calculations of air vapour mixtures by

using chart and expressions. Psychrometric process –adiabatic saturation, sensible heating and

cooling, humidification, dehumidification, evaporative cooling and adiabatic mixing. Simple

Applications

OUTCOMES :

1. Students are able to analyze various Energy Transferring / transforming equipment using

First law of thermodynamics

2. Students are able to analyze various Energy Transferring / transforming equipment using

50

Second law of thermodynamics.

3. Students are able to analyze the performance of steam power plant cycle with the help of

steam table and charts.

4. Students are able to obtain different thermodynamic relations and equations for ideal and

real gases

5. Students will be able to analyze the various Psychrometric process and its applications

and also able to analyze the properties of Gas mixtures.

Upon the completion of this course, The students can be able to

Apply the thermodynamic principles to Mechanical Engineering applications.

Apply mathematical fundamentals to study the properties of steam and gas mixtures.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Nag P.K “Engineering Thermodynamics” 5th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, New Delhi 2013

2. Natarajan E., "Engineering Thermodynamics: Fundamentals and Applications", Anuragam

Publications, 2012.

3. Rajput R.K., “ Thermal Engineering”, Lakshmi Publications, Tenth Edition, 2017

REFERENCES :

1. Yunus A. Cengel and Michael A.Boles “Thermodynamics an engineering approach”, 8th

Edition Tata McGraw hill Publications. 2014.

2. Holman J.P., “Thermodynamics”, 3rd Edition, McGraw – Hill 1995.

3. Rathakrishnan E “ Fundamentals of Engineering Thermodynamics” 2nd Edition, Prentice –Hall

of India Pvt.Ltd, 2006

4. Chattopadhyay.P “Engineering Thermodynamics” Oxford University Press 2010.

5. Arora C.P “Thermodynamics” Tata McGraw – Hill, New Delhi 2003

6. Gordon J Van Wylen and Richard E Sonntag, “Fundamentals of Classical Thermodynamics”

Wiley Eastern, 1987

7. Venkatesh A. “ Basic Engineering Thermodynamics” Universities Press ( India) Limited 2007

8. Kau-Fui Vincent Wong, “Thermodynamics for Engineers” CRC Press 2010 India Reprint

9. Prasanna Kumar, “ Engineering Thermodynamics” Pearson Education, 2013

51

ME 18302 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the fundamentals of various forming and Joining process

To select a suitable manufacturing process for a given application

Identify the defects in any manufacturing process

To justify the need for High energy rate and special forming process

To understand the processing method available for thermoplastics and thermosetting

plastics

UNIT I METAL CASTING PROCESSES 10

Introduction, Patterns – Materials, Types and Pattern allowances, Cores – Core Prints, Core

making and Types of cores, Moulding sand – Properties, types, Moulding Machines – squeeze

type, Jolt type and sand slinger, Melting Practices – Cupola and Induction Furnaces, Mould –

Expendable and Permanent Mould, Green sand Mould preparation, Special casting Processes –

Investment casting, Die casting – Hot chamber and Cold Chamber, Slush Casting, Centrifugal

Casting – True, Semi and Centrifuging, Continuous Casting, Shell Moulding, Ceramic Mould

Casting, CO2 Process, Stir Casting Process– Defects in casting

UNIT II JOINING PROCESSES 10

Fusion Welding Processes – Types of Gas Welding – Flame Characteristics , Oxy Fuel Gas

Welding, Types of Gas welding Technique, Arc Welding – Arc welding Equipments, Fillers and

Flux Materials, Electrodes – Coated electrode designation, Consumable Electrode – Shielded

Metal Arc Welding, Submerged Arc Welding, Gas Metal Arc Welding, Flux Cored Arc

Welding, Electro slag welding, Electro gas welding, Non Consumable Electrode – Gas Tungsten

Arc Welding, Atomic Hydrogen Welding, Plasma Arc Welding, Electron Beam Welding, Laser

Beam Welding, Solid State welding – Ultrasonic Welding, Friction Welding – Friction Stir

Welding, Resistance welding – Types, Welding defects, Soldering and Brazing

UNIT III BULK DEFORMATION PROCESSES 9

Metal Forming Classification, Hot working, Cold Working and Warm Working of metals,

Recrystallization Temperature.

Forging – Outline of Forging and related operations (Edging, Heading, Fullering, Drawing out,

Upsetting, Drawing down, Swaging, Blocking, Coining, Trimming), Various Forging Processes

such as Open and Closed die forging, Roll Forging, Iso thermal Forging and Orbital Forging,

Defects in Forging

Extrusion Process – Types of Extrusion Process- Direct and Indirect Extrusion, Hydrostatic

Extrusion, Impact Extrusion, Side extrusion, Extrusion defects

Rolling Processes – Terminology – Blooms, Billet, Slab, Plate, sheet, Foil, Types of rolling

mills, Roll Pass design, Shape rolling operations, Thread Rolling, Ring Rolling, Gear Rolling,

Roll piercing process, Rolling defects

Principles of rod, wire and tube drawing- Seamless tubes and Tube drawing methods

UNIT IV SHEET METAL FORMING PROCESSES 9

Definitions of Various Press Operations – Blanking, Punching, Shaving, Perforating, Lancing,

Slitting, Trimming, Bending, Drawing, squeezing, Press working Terminology, Types of dies for

Sheet metal operations, Press Tonnage calculation, Sheet Metal Forming operations – Bending

52

and Drawing- Elastic recovery or spring back effect, Stretch forming, Rubber pad forming,

Hydroforming, Metal Spinning – Types, High Energy Rate Forming Process – Explosive

Forming, Magnetic Pulse Forming, Electro Hydraulic Forming, Superplastic Forming,

UNIT V PROCESSING OF PLASTICS AND POWDER METALLURGY 7

Types of plastics – Types of Moulding – Injection Moulding, Blow Moulding, Compression

Moulding, Transfer Moulding, Rotational Moulding, Extrusion, Thermoforming, Calendaring

Powder Metallurgy – Production of metal Powders, Compaction – Sintering and Finishing,

Advantages and disadvantages of powder metallurgy.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Select a suitable casting process for a given engineering component

2. Given a material, the students will Apply a suitable joining process

3. Identify defects and interpret the causes for a particular defect and also provide a

remedy for a particular defect in casting, forming and joining process

4. Given a part diagram, the students will select a suitable deformation process

5. Students will be able to select a suitable process for thermo setting plastics and

thermoplastics

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hajra Choudhury, "Elements of Workshop Technology", Vol.I: Manufacturing

Processes., Media Promoters & Publishers Pvt Ltd, 15th edition, 2012.

2. Serope Kalpakjian & Steven R. Schmid, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”,

Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd, 7th edition, 2018

3. Dr. P.C. Sharma, “A Textbook of Production Technology (Manufacturing Processes), S.

Chand & Company Ltd, 8th edition, 2014

REFERENCES :

1. Mikell P. Groover, “Principles of Modern Manufacturing”, SI version, Wiley & Sons Pvt

Ltd, Global Edition, 2016

2. R.K. Rajput, “A text book of Manufacturing Technology (Manufacturing Processes)”,

Laxmi Publications (p) Ltd, 2016

3. Rao. P.N, “ Manufacturing Technology”, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd, Volume

1, 5th edition, 2018

4. Serope Kalpakjian &Stevan R. Schmid, “ Manufacturing Processes for Engineering

Materials”, Pearson India Education Services Pvt. Ltd, 6th edition, 2018

E- Resources

1. http://www.ipme.ru/e-journals/RAMS/no_15418/04_15418_kawasaki.pdf

2. https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/6f56/4a28d39f1365f337be04922424472dcf3413.pdf

3. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107144/

http://www.ipme.ru/e-journals/RAMS/no_15418/04_15418_kawasaki.pdf

https://pdfs.semanticscholar.org/6f56/4a28d39f1365f337be04922424472dcf3413.pdf

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107144/

53

ME 18303 MATERIAL CHARACTERIZATION AND METALLURGY L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To impart knowledge on the structure, properties, heat treatment, testing and applications of

metals and non-metallic materials so as to identify and select suitable materials for various

engineering applications.

UNIT I ALLOYS AND PHASE DIAGRAMS 7

Constitution of alloys – Solid solutions, Substitutional and Interstitial –Phase Diagrams-Unary

and Binary Phase diagrams of solid materials- Hume-Rothery rule, Gibbs phase rule. Invariant

reactions-eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic and peritectoid reactions. Iron – carbon equilibrium

diagram-micro constituents and invariant reactions.

UNIT II HEAT TREATMENT 11

Definition – Full annealing, stress relief, recrystallization and spheroidizing – Normalizing,

Hardening and Tempering of steels. Quenching -different quenching medium and their

characteristics. Isothermal Transformation diagrams – cooling curves superimposed on I.T.

diagram, CCR, Hardenability, Jominy end Quench test - Austempering, Martempering. Case

hardening - Carburizing, Nitriding, Cyaniding, Carbonitriding, Vacuum and Plasma hardening.

Selective hardening – Flame and Induction hardening. Sintering using powder metallurgy.

UNIT III FERROUS AND NON-FERROUS METALS 9

Classification of Steel & Cast Iron - Low carbon, medium carbon & High carbon steels. Grey,

White, Malleable, Spheroidal cast irons – Alloy cast irons. Effect of alloying elements on steel- α

and β stabilizers– Stainless and Tool steels – HSLA, Maraging steels.

Copper and its alloys – Brass, Bronze and Cupronickel – Aluminium and its alloys, Al-Cu –

precipitation strengthening treatment – Bearing alloys-Al, Cu and White metal bearing alloys,

Magnesiumalloys, Nickel based super alloys and Titanium alloys. An introduction to Nano

materials

UNIT IV NON-METALLIC MATERIALS 7

Polymers – types of polymer, Commodity and Engineering polymers. Polymerization and its

types. Properties and applications of various Thermosetting and Thermoplastics-PP, PS, PVC,

PMMA, PET,PC, PA, ABS, PI, PAI, PPO, PPS, PEEK, PTFE –Urea and Phenol formaldehydes.

Engineering Ceramics – Properties and applications of Al2O3, SiC, Si3N4, PSZ and SIALON –

Composites- Classifications-Fiber and particulate reinforced composites - FRP - Applications of

Composites.

UNIT V MATERIAL CHARACTERIZATION 11

Elastic & Plastic deformation, Young’s modulus, Stress-Strain diagram of Steel andAluminium.

Mechanisms of plastic deformation-Slip and Twinning. Types of fracture -Ductile and Brittle.

Testing of materials under Tension, Compression, Torsion and Shear loads. Hardness tests -

Brinell, Vickers and Rockwell. Impact test-lzod and Charpy. Fatigue and Creep - Failure

mechanisms, Fatigue andCreep testing of steels.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will be able to acquire knowledge on microstructure and compositions of different

types of steels and cast ironsand analyze the effects of carbon content on the formation

different phases in the Iron-Carbon system.

2. Students will be able to understand the formation of non-equilibrium phases in steels using

54

Time-Temperature-Transformation curve.

3. Students will be able apply their knowledge acquired on basics of material science and

select the appropriate heat treatment and surface treatment processes for various engineering

applications.

4. Students will be able to recommend suitable non-ferrous alloys, plastics, ceramics and

composites for different engineering applications based on their properties. 5. Students will gain knowledge on deformation and fracture mechanisms of steels and will be

able to evaluate mechanical properties of both ferrous and non-ferrous alloys through

different mechanical testing as per ASTM standards.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Raghavan.V., Materials Science and Engineering, Prentice Hall of India, 5th edition, 2007

2. Srinivasan. R., Engineering Materials and Metallurgy, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2nd edition, 2010

REFERENCES :

1. Agarwal, Science of Engineering Materials, Tata McGraw-Hill, 8th edition, 2012.

2. Avner, S. H., Introduction to physical metallurgy,TataMcGraw-Hill, 2nd edition, 2013.

3. Bolton, W., Engineering materials technology, 3rd edition, 1998.

4. Kenneth G.Budinski and Michael K.Budinski, Engineering Materials: properties and

selection, Prentice-Hall of India, 9th edition, 2010

5. William D.Callister, Material Science and Engineering, John Wiley and Sons, 10th edition,

2017.

E - RESOURCES

1. NPTEL course https://nptel.ac.in/courses/113107078/.


55

ME 18304 MECHANICS OF SOLIDS L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES :

To develop the relationship between the loads applied to a non-rigid body and the internal

stresses and deformations induced in the body.

To familiarize the student in calculating shear force, bending moment, deflection and

slopes in various types of beams for different loading conditions.

To solve practical problems related to springs and shafts.

UNIT I STRESS AND STRAIN 9

Tension, Compression, Shearing Stresses and Strains - Stress-Strain relationship, Hooke’s law,

Poisson’s ratio – Elastic constants and their relations- Volumetric Strains, Thermal stresses,

composite bars

UNIT II MEMBERS SUBJECTED TO FLEXURAL LOADS 9

Shear force and bending moment. Relation between load, shear force and bending moment.

Construction of Shear force diagrams and Bending moment diagrams for different types of static

loading on cantilever, simply supported and overhanging beams.

Theory of simple bending, bending stresses, section modulus, bending stress and shear stress

distribution in beams.

UNIT III TRANSVERSE DEFLECTIONOF BEAMS 9

Governing differential equation– Macaulay’s method – Area moment method for computation of

slopes and deflections in beams - Conjugate beam and strain energy method.

UNIT IV TORSION OF SHAFTS AND SPRINGS 9

Torsion formulation stresses and deformation in circular and hollow shafts – Stepped shafts–

Deflection in shafts fixed at the both ends-Stresses in helical springs – Deflection of helical

springs subjected to tension loan only, carriage springs.

UNIT V BI-AXIAL STRESS SYSTEM 9

Biaxial state of stress – Stress at a point – stresses on inclined planes – Principal stresses and

Principal strains and Mohr’s circle of stress, Theories of failure

Stresses in thin cylindrical shell due to internal pressure - circumferential and longitudinal

stresses and deformation in thin and thick cylinders – spherical shells subjected to internal

pressure –Deformation in spherical shells – Lame’s theorem

TOTAL : L45 +T15 = 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

Student will be able to

1. Apply concepts of stress strain relationship to obtain solutions for real time Engineering

problems.

2. Analyze the engineering problem and will identify suitable beam, based on loading

conditions.

3. Analyze the different types of loading and the consequent deflection in the beams.

4. Analyze and identify suitable geometry for the shaft and pressure vessels.

5. Apply the concept of theories of failure to different loading conditions.

56

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bansal, R.K., "A Textbook of Strength of Materials", Laxmi Publications (P) Ltd., 6th

edition, 2018

2. Jindal U.C., "Strength of Materials", Asian Books Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2017

3. Bedi D S, Strength of Materials, Khanna Publishing House,2019

4. Subramanian R , Strength of Materials, Oxford University Press, 2016

REFERENCES :

1. Egor. P. Popov, "Engineering Mechanics of Solids", Pearson, 2010.

2. Ferdinand P. Beer, Russell Johnson,and John J. Dewole "Mechanics of Materials",

McGraw Hill Education, 7th edition, 2014.

3. Hibbeler, R.C., "Mechanics of Materials", Pearson Education, 10th Edition, 2016

4. Rattan S S, “Strength of Materials”, McGraw Hill Education, 3rd Edition, 2017

5. Ramamrutham S and Narayan R, "Strength of Materials", Dhanpat Rai and Sons, New

Delhi, 2008.

6. Rajput R K, Strength of Materials, Laxmi Publications,2018 7. Punmia Jain and Jain, Mechanics of Materials, Laxmi Publications,2017.

E- Resources

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107146

2. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112106141

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112107146

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112106141

57

EE18352 ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND CONTROLS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To obtain an overview of different dc and ac motors and their characteristics.

To study the different methods of starting, braking and speed control of DC, Induction

motors.

To study the open loop and closed loop control of electrical drives

To understand the operation of special electrical machines

UNIT I INTRODUCTION 9

Basic Elements – Types of drives – Factors influencing the choice of electrical drives –

Mechanical characteristics – Speed-Torque characteristics of various loads - Duty classes – Safety

and Maintenance.

UNIT II DRIVE MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS 9

DC motors: principle, classification, characteristics, merits & demerits, applications –

Three phase and single phase Induction motors: principle, classification, characteristics, merits &

demerits, applications – Starting and braking of dc and ac motors.

UNIT III SPEED CONTROL OF DC & AC DRIVES 9

Speed control of DC motors – Armature and field control using controlled rectifiers and DC

choppers –– Speed, direction and position control with PWM using H-bridge.

Speed control of three phase induction motor – Voltage control, V/F control, slip power recovery

scheme – Control using inverters and AC voltage regulators.

UNIT IV CLOSED LOOP CONTROL OF DC & AC DRIVES 9

Open and closed loop control - Modeling of mechanical, electrical & fluid power systems -

Transfer function – Basics of microprocessor and microcontrollers – PID controllers – Closed loop

control of DC and AC Drives

UNIT V SPECIAL MACHINES & APPLICATIONS 9

Principle, classification, construction and characteristics of Stepper motor, DC and AC Servo

motor, BLDC motor, Switched reluctance motor &Piezo electric actuator – Driver circuits for

speed and position control of stepper motor – Drive applications in Robotics, Industrial assembly

lines and CNC machines.

TOTAL: (L: 45+ T:0): 45PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

To be able to

Operate and describe the characteristics of dc and ac motors.

Start, brake and control the speed of dc and ac motors.

Understand the operation of converters, choppers, inverters and ac voltage controllers.

Outline the closed loop control schematics for dc, ac drives.

Use dc, ac drives and special machines for the given application.

58

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gopal K.Dubey, “Fundamentals of Electrical Drives”, Alpha Science International Ltd, 2001

2. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines”, IV edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010.

3. Vedam Subramaniam, “Electric Drives - Concepts and applications”, II edition, Tata

McGraw Hill, 2011.

REFERENCES:

1. Hughes E, “Electrical and Electronic technology”, 11th edition, Pearson, 2012.

2. Partab, H., “Art & Science of utilization of Electrical Energy”, DhanpatRai& Sons, 2017.

3. Philip Kiameh, “Electrical Equipment Handbook: Troubleshooting &Maintenance” McGraw

hill, 2003.

4. Pillai. S.K “A first course on Electric drives”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 1998.

5. Singh. M.D.,K.B. Khanchandani, “Power Electronics”, II edition. Tata McGraw-Hill, 2008.

59

EE18361 ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES :

To learn the operation, starting and control of dc, ac and special machines by actual

experimentation.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Load test on DC Shunt & DC Series motor

2. Starting and Speed control of DC shunt motor (Armature, Field control)

3. Load test on three phase squirrel cage Induction motor

4. Starting and Speed control of three phase Induction Motor

5. Load test on single phase Induction Motor.

6. DC motor speed control with PWM using H-bridge

7. Characteristics of dc and ac servo motors

8. Speed and position control using stepper motor

9. Closed loop control with PID regulators

10. Study of BLDC and SRM drives

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES

To be able to

Understand the characteristics of dc and ac motors

Start and control the speed of dc and ac motors with power electronic converters

Characterize and control dc, ac servo motors

Characterize and control stepper motors

Control using PID regulators.

REFERENCES :

1. Nagrath .I.J. & Kothari .D.P, “Electrical Machines”, IV edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2010

2. Pillai.S.K “A first course on Electric drives”, Wiley Eastern Limited, 1998

3. Vedam Subramaniam, "Electric Drives (Concepts and Applications", Tata McGraw-Hill,

2011.

60


S.No. Description of Equipment Qty 1. DC Shunt motor 2

2. DC Series motor 1

3. DC shunt motor-DC Shunt Generator set 1

4. DC Shunt motor-DC Series Generator set 1

5. Single phase Induction motor set 1

6. DC motor with PWM using H-Bridge circuit set-up 1

7. DC and AC servo motor set-up 1

8. PID controller set up for controlling position and speed

(along with any one motor)

1

9 SRM drive unit 1

10. BLDC unit 1

11 Stepper motor set-up for speed and position control 1

61

ME18311 MANUFACTURING PROCESSES LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES

To impart the practical knowledge in casting and Joining Process

To impart the basic machining skills in lathe and to equip with the practical knowledge

required in the core industries.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

CASTING

Study of various types of patterns, pattern materials, foundry tools

1. Preparation of green sand mould for single piece pattern

2. Preparation of green sand mould for split patterns

3. Melting of non ferrous alloys and making a casting (Demonstration)

Welding

Study of arc welding and gas welding equipments, types of electrodes

1. Fabrication of simple structural shapes using Gas Metal Arc Welding

2. Joining of plates using Metal Inert Gas Welding / Gas Metal Arc Welding

3. Demonstration of Tungsten Arc Welding, Cold Metal Transfer Welding and Friction Stir

Welding

LATHE

Study of lathe, various mechanisms, work holding devices, tool holding devices and various

Machining operations

1. Plain, Turning and Taper Turning

2. External & Internal Thread cutting & Knurling

3. Eccentric Turning

4. Estimation of machining time for the above turning processes

5. Pin and bush assembly

6. Dismantling and assembly of headstock and tail stock of a lathe.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

Upon completion of this course, the students can able to

1. Demonstrate and fabricate different types of components using the machine tools.

2. Make a green sand mould using different patterns.

3. Select the suitable welding parameters to make a welded component using Arc and MIG

welding

62


1. Centre Lathes 7 Nos.

2. Arc Welding machine 5 nos

3. Metal Inert Gas Welding 1 no

REFERENCES :



2. Dr. P.C. Sharma, “A Textbook of Production Technology (Manufacturing Processes), S.

Chand & Company Ltd, 8th edition, 2014

63

ME 18312 MATERIAL TESTING AND METALLURGY

LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES :

To supplement the theoretical knowledge gained in Mechanics of Solids and Material

Characterization and Metallurgy with practical testing for determining the strength of

materials under externally applied loads. This would enable the student to have a clear

understanding of the design for strength and stiffness.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Tension test on a mild steel rod

2. Double shear test on Mild steel and Aluminium rods

3. Torsion test on mild steel rod

4. Impact test on metal specimen (Charpy & Izod)

5. Hardness test on metals – Vickers Micro-hardness, Brinell and Rockwell Hardness

Number

6. Deflection test on beams (Simply supported and Cantilever )

7. Compression test on helical springs

8. Strain Measurement using Rosette strain gauge

9. Comparison of Mechanical properties of steel – using impact & hardness tests

i. Unhardened specimen

ii. Quenched Specimen and

iii. Quenched and tempered specimen

10. Microscopic Examination of

i. Hardened samples and

ii. Hardened and tempered samples

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES

Students will be able to determine the various mechanical properties like hardness,

strengths of metallic materials (yield, ultimate, fracture, torsion& impact strengths) using

appropriate machines.

Students will gain hands-on experience with the evaluation methodology of Young’s

modulus for steel & aluminum using simply supported and cantilever methods.

Students will be able to evaluate the stiffness and spring index of steel spring using

compression test.

Students will be able to analyze the microstructure of various heat treated steel, copper

alloy and aluminum alloy using optical microscope

REFERENCES :

1. Strength of materials laboratory manual, Anna University, Chennai - 600 025.

2. IS1786-2008, specification for cold worked steel high strength deformed bars for

concrete reinforcement, 2008.

64



HARDWARE

1. Universal Tensile Testing machine with double shear

attachment (40 Ton Capacity)

1

2. Torsion Testing Machine (60 Nm Capacity) 1

3. Impact Testing Machine (300 Nm Capacity) 1

4. Brinell Hardness Testing Machine 1

5. Rockwell Hardness Testing Machine 1

6. Spring Testing Machine for tensile and compressive loads

(2500 N)

1

7. Muffle Furnace (8000 C) 1

8. Vickers Micro-hardness Tester 1

9 Deflection (Beam) testing setup – Simply supported &

Cantilever

1

10. Metallurgical Microscopes 2

11 Metallurgical specimen polishing machine 1

12 Rosette straingauge setup 1

13 Jomni End Quench Test setup 1

65

SEMESTER - IV

MA18451 COMPUTATIONAL METHODS L T P C

2 1 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

This course aims at providing the necessary basic concepts of a few numerical methods and

give procedures for solving numerically different kinds of problems occurring in

Engineering and Technology.

UNIT I SOLUTION OF EQUATIONS AND EIGENVALUE

PROBLEMS

9

Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations – Newton Raphson method- Solution of linear

system of equations - Gauss elimination method – Pivoting - Gauss Jordan method – Gauss Seidel

iterative method - Matrix Inversion by Gauss Jordan method - Eigen values of a matrix by Power

method.

UNIT II INTERPOLATION AND APPROXIMATION 9

Interpolation with unequal intervals - Lagrange's interpolation – Inverse interpolation using

Lagrange's method - Newton’s divided difference interpolation – Interpolation with equal intervals

- Newton’s forward and backward difference formulae.

UNIT III NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIATION AND INTEGRATION 9

Approximation of derivatives using interpolation polynomials - Numerical integration using

Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 rule - Two point and three point Gaussian quadrature formulae –

Evaluation of double integrals by Trapezoidal and Simpson’s 1/3 rules.

UNIT IV INITIAL VALUE PROBLEMS FOR ORDINARY

DIFFERENTIALEQUATIONS

9

Single Step methods - Taylor’s series method - Modified Euler’s method – Fourth order Runge-

Kutta method for solving first order equations, second order equations and simultaneous first order

equations- Multi step methods - Milne’s and Adams- Bash forth predictor corrector methods for

solving first order equations.

UNIT V BOUNDARY VALUE PROBLEMS IN PARTIAL

DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS

9

Finite difference techniques for the solution of two dimensional Laplace’s and Poisson’s equations

on rectangular domain – One dimensional heat flow equation by explicit and implicit (Crank

Nicholson) methods – One dimensional wave equation by explicit method.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

The students will have a clear perception of the power of computational techniques, ideas and

would be able to demonstrate the applications of these techniques to problems drawn from

industry, management and other Engineering fields..

66

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Grewal. B.S., and Grewal. J.S., Numerical methods in Engineering and Science, Khanna

Publishers, 9th Edition, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Iyengar. S.R.K., andJain. R.K, Numerical Methods, New Age International Publishers, New

Delhi,2012.

3. William Embleton OBE and Leslie Jackson, Reed’s Mathematics for Engineers, Adlard

Coles Nautical, London, 2011.(for Marine Engineers)

REFERENCES:

1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 7th Edition, Wiley, India, 2007.

2. Chapra. S.C., and Canale.R.P., Numerical Methods for Engineers, Tata McGraw Hill,5th

Edition, New Delhi, 2007.

3. Brian Bradie. A friendly introduction to Numerical analysis, Pearson Education, Asia, New

Delhi, 2007.

4. SankaraRao. K., Numerical methods for Scientists and Engineers, Prentice Hall of India

Private, 3rd Edition, New Delhi, 2007.

5. Gerald. C. F., and Wheatley. P. O., Applied Numerical Analysis, Pearson Education, Asia,

6th Edition, New Delhi, 2006.

6. Venkataraman. M.K. Numerical Methods in Science and Engineering, National Publishers,

1995.

7. Kandasamy. K., Thilagavathy. K., and Gunavathi. K., Numerical Methods, S. Chand &

Company Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.

67

ME18401 THERMAL ENGINEERING L T P C

3 1 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To integrate the concepts, laws and methodologies from the first course in

thermodynamics into analysis of cyclic processes

To apply the thermodynamic concepts into various thermal applications like IC engines,

Steam Turbines, Compressors and Refrigeration and Air conditioning systems

(Use of standard refrigerant property databook, Steam Tables, Mollier diagram and

Psychrometric chart permitted)

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF IC ENGINES AND GAS POWER CYCLES 12

Working principles of IC engines. Classifications-Components and their functions. Valve timing

diagram and port timing diagram-actual and theoretical p-V diagram of four stroke and two

stroke engines. Otto, Diesel, Dual, Brayton cycles, Calculation of mean effective pressure, and air standard efficiency-Comparison of cycles.

UNIT II INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES SYSTEM AND

PERFORMANCE

12

Simple and complete Carburetor. MPFI, Diesel pump and injector system, CRDI. Battery and

Magneto Ignition System- Principles of Combustion and knocking in SI and CI Engines.

Lubrication and Cooling systems. Performance calculations -Fuel consumption, Brake power,

Indicated power, Friction power, Thermal efficiencies and Heat Balance sheet.

UNIT III STEAM NOZZLES AND TURBINES 12

Flow of steam through nozzles, shapes of nozzles, effect of friction, critical pressure ratio, super

saturated flow. Impulse and Reaction principles, compounding, velocity diagram for simple and

multi-stage turbines, speed regulations– Governors.

UNIT IV AIR COMPRESSOR 12

Classification and working principle of various types of compressors, work of compression with

and without clearance, Volumetric efficiency, Isothermal efficiency and Isentropic efficiency of

reciprocating compressors, Multistage air compressor and intercooling – work of multistage air

compressor. Applications of air compressor in Automobile vehicles

UNIT V REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 12

Refrigeration-Vapour compression refrigeration cycle-super heat, subcooling – Performance

calculations – working principle of Vapour absorption system, Ammonia–Water, Lithium

bromide–water systems (Descriptive only). Airconditioning system - Processes, Types and

Working Principles –Concept of RSHF,GSHF,ESHF-Cooling load estimation (Descriptive

only). Refrigerants – desirable properties, refrigerants used in modern Refrigerators and Air-

conditioners.

TOTAL: (L: 45+ T:15 ): 60PERIODS

68

OUTCOMES:

1. Student are able to compare and contrast the various system & components of IC engine

and also to analyze their performance of air standard cycles

2. Student are able to understand the various system used in IC engine and also to analyze

their performance.

3. Students are able to distinguish the different types of nozzle, turbines and compressor and

to analyze their performance

4. Students are able to distinguish the different types of nozzle, turbines and compressor and

to analyze their performance

5. Students are able to analyze the performance of different air conditioning system and to

design an air conditioning system for chosen application.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kothandaraman. C.P., Domkundwar. S, Domkundwar. A.V., "A course in Thermal

Engineering", Fifth Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Sons,2002.

2. Rajput. R.K., "Thermal Engineering", Laxmi Publications, Tenth Edition, 2017.

REFERENCES:

1. Arora. C.P, "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning",Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 1994.

2. Ganesan.V, "Internal Combustion Engines", Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.

3. Ramalingam. K.K.,"Thermal Engineering", SCITECH Publications (India) Pvt.Ltd., 2009.

4. Rudramoorthy. R.,"Thermal Engineering", TataMcGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.

5. Sarkar. B.K,"Thermal Engineering",Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers, 2007.

69

ME 18402 MACHINE TOOLS AND MACHINING PROCESSES L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To acquire knowledge about the theory of metal cutting, mechanism of chip formation and

the cutting parameters that influence the machining processes

Understand the types of machine tools, their specifications and operations performed.

To choose a particular type of machine tool depending upon the surface being generated

To teach the students about the different gear generation methods

Get introduced to the non-traditional machining processes.

UNIT I METAL CUTTING THEORY & SIMPLE MACHINING

PROCESSES

9

Introduction to Metal Cutting, Cutting tools – Nomenclature, Materials, Tool Life, Tool Wear,

Cutting fluids & Thermal aspects, Chips: Mechanics of chip formation, Types of chips,

Orthogonal metal cutting - Single point cutting tool, Forces in Machining – Merchant’s Circle

diagram, Oblique cutting, Tool dynamometer – Types, Construction and working.

UNIT II CONVENTIONAL AND SEMI AUTOMATS 9

Lathe –Classification, Constructional features, Various Operations – Taper turning methods,

Thread cutting methods, Machining time and Power estimation. Capstan and turret lathes- Tool

layout, Work holding devices – Types and construction, Lathe specifications, Operation planning

sheet for turned components

UNIT III OTHER MACHINE TOOLS & GEAR MANUFACTURING 9

Drilling,, Shaping and Milling machines – Classification, Construction and operations, Cutters

& types, Comparison of processes. Broaching Machines – Push, Pull, surface and continuous

broaching. Nomenclature of Drill tool, Milling tool, reamers and broaching tool. Operation

planning sheet.

Gear cutting: Classification, Principle and construction of Gear milling, Hobbing and Shaping

processes. Procedure for generating spur and helical gear.

UNIT IV ABRASIVE PROCESSES & CNC MACHINES 9

Finishing processes: Grinding - cylindrical grinding, surface grinding, centreless grinding and

internal grinding, Grinding wheel specification, Buffing, Honing & Lapping, Super Finishing,

Laser Ablation.

Computer Numerical Control (CNC) machine tools –Constructional details, Special features,

Turning centre, Machining centre. Introduction to Part programming – Fanuc – G & M codes,

sample programs for simple lathe and milling operations.

UNIT V INTRODUCTION TO NON TRADITONAL MACHINING

PROCESSES

9

Introduction, Classification, Abrasive Jet Machining, Waterjet Machining, Ultrasonic

Machining, Electrical Discharge Machining, Wire Cut EDM, Chemical Machining, Electro

Chemical machining, Electro chemical grinding, Laser Beam Machining , Electron beam

machining, Plasma Arc Machining - Working Principles, Equipment used and Applications.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

70

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will be able to estimate the cutting force during machining, identify the type of

chips for a given material and will justify the tool angles for a given single point cutting tool.

2. The students will be able to explain the construction details and will prepare the operation

planning sheet for a given part diagram

3. Students will explain the various gear manufacturing process and its associate machine tools

4. Students will explain the need for various finishing processes

5. Understand the principle of various non – traditional machining processes

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Hajra Choudhury, "Elements of Workshop Technology", Vol.II., Media Promoters,

2010.

2. Vijay.K. Jain “Advanced Machining Processes” Allied Publishers Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi, 2009.

REFERENCES :

1. Geofrey Boothroyd, "Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools", CRC

Press, 2005.

2. Mikell P. Groover, “Principles of Modern Manufacturing”, SI version, Wiley & Sons Pvt

Ltd, Global Edition, 2016

3. Paul De Garmo, J.T. Black, and Ronald. A. Kohser, “Material and Processes in

Manufacturing”, Wiley Publications, 12th edition, 2017



E RESOURCES

1. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/nptel_data3/html/mhrd/ict/text/112105233/lec19.pdf

2. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~vkjain/Lecture2-Metalcutting.pdf

3. https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112105127/pdf/LM-32.pdf

4. http://utopm.fsid.cvut.cz/podklady/TE2/Lectures/Lecture_no_10_Gears_Machining.pdf

5. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~nsinha/Non-traditional-machining.pdf

6. http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/mev303/OVERVIEW_OF_NTM_PROCESSE

S.pdf

https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/nptel_data3/html/mhrd/ict/text/112105233/lec19.pdf

http://home.iitk.ac.in/~vkjain/Lecture2-Metalcutting.pdf

https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/courses/112105127/pdf/LM-32.pdf

http://utopm.fsid.cvut.cz/podklady/TE2/Lectures/Lecture_no_10_Gears_Machining.pdf

http://home.iitk.ac.in/~nsinha/Non-traditional-machining.pdf

http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/mev303/OVERVIEW_OF_NTM_PROCESSES.pdf

http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/mev303/OVERVIEW_OF_NTM_PROCESSES.pdf

71

ME18403 KINEMATICS OF MACHINERY L T P C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES : To impart knowledge of motion characteristics of mechanisms and machine to make the

Students to develop new mechanisms.

UNIT I BASICS OF MECHANISMS AND SYNTHESIS OF LINKAGES 12

Classification of mechanisms – Basic kinematic concepts and definitions – Degree of freedom,

Mobility – Kutzbach criterion, Gruebler‟s criterion – Grashof‟s Law – Kinematic inversions of

Four-bar chain and Slider crank chains – Limit positions – Mechanical advantage – Transmission

Angle – Description of some common mechanisms – Quick return mechanisms, Straight line

generators, Universal Joint – rocker mechanisms.

SYNTHESIS OF LINKAGES: Number and Dimensional synthesis – Two position synthesis of

slider crank and four bar- mechanisms.

UNIT II KINEMATICS OF LINKAGE MECHANISMS 8

Displacement, velocity and acceleration analysis of simple mechanisms – Graphical method–

Velocity and acceleration polygons – Velocity analysis using instantaneous centres – kinematic

analysis of simple mechanisms – Coincident points – Coriolis component of Acceleration

UNIT III KINEMATICS OF CAM MECHANISMS 8

Classification of cams and followers – Terminology and definitions – Displacement diagrams –

Uniform velocity, parabolic, simple harmonic and cycloidal motions – Derivatives of follower

motions, Layout of plate cam profiles - Pressure angle and undercutting.

UNIT IV GEARS AND GEAR TRAINS 9

Law of toothed gearingand conjugate action – Involutes and cycloidal tooth profiles –Spur Gear

terminology and definitions –Gear tooth action – contact ratio – Interference and undercutting.

Helical, Bevel, Worm, Rack and Pinion gears [Basics only].

Gear trains – Speed ratio, train value – Parallel axis gear trains – Epicyclic Gear Trains.

UNIT V FRICTION IN MACHINE ELEMENTS 8

Surface contacts – Sliding and Rolling friction – Friction drives – Friction in screw threads –

Friction clutches– Friction in brakes- Band and Block brakes- Basics of Bearings and lubrication.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will be able to demonstrate the concepts of mechanisms involved in

various applications

2. Students will be able to design few linkage mechanisms for specified output

motions

3. Students will be able to compute the displacement, velocity and acceleration for

planar mechanisms in machines.

4. Students will be able to recommend the profile in cam and gear mechanisms.

5. Students will be able to evaluate the motion and the dynamical forces acting on

mechanical systems

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Rattan S S, “Theory of Machines”, Tata McGraw -Hill Publishers,New Delhi, 2017.

72

2. Sadhu Singh, “Theory of Machines”, Pearson Education, Second Edition, 2011.

3. Ghosh A. and Mallick A.K., Theory of Mechanisms and Machines, Affiliated East West Pvt.

Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.

4. Ghosh A. and Mallick A.K., Theory of Mechanisms and Machines, Affiliated East West Pvt.

Ltd, New Delhi, 2008.

5. Thomas Bevan, Theory of Machines, 3rd edition, CBS Publishers & Distributors, 2009.

REFERENCES :

1. Erdman AG and Sandor G N, “Mechanism Design, Analysis and Synthesis”, Vol.I, PHI

Inc., 2001.

2. Khurmi, R.S., “Theory of Machines”,14th Edition, S Chand Publications, 2015

3. Rao J S and Dukkipati, “Mechanism and Machine Theory”, Wiley- Eastern Ltd., New Delhi,

2015.

4. CleghornW.L. , Mechanisms of Machines, Oxford University Press, 2nd Edition,2015

6. John Joseph Uicker, Gordon Pennock, JoselphE.Shigley, “Theory of Machines and

Mechanisms”, Fifth Edition, Oxford University Press, 2017.

7. Robert L. Norton, Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery, Tata McGrawHill, 2017.

E- Resources


2. https://www.mekanizmalar.com/

3. http://dynref.engr.illinois.edu/aml.html

STANDARDS

1. IS 2458 : 2001, Vocabulary of Gear Terms –Definitions related to Geometry.

2. IS 3756 : 2002, Method of Gear Correction –Addendum modification for External

cylindrical gears with parallel axes.

3. IS 5267 : 2002 Vocabulary of Gear Terms –Definitions Related to Worm Gear

Geometry.

4. IS 12328 : Part 1: 1988 Bevel Gear Systems Part –1 Straight Bevel Gears.

5. IS 12328 : 1988 Bevel Systems Part –2 Spiral Bevel Gears.

73

ME18404 HYDRAULICS AND PNEUMATICS SYSTEMS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

This course will give an appreciation of the fundamental principles, design and operation of

hydraulic and pneumatic machines, components and systems and their application in recent

automation revolution

UNIT I FLUID POWER PRINCIPLES AND FUNDAMENTALS 7

Introduction, Advantages and Applications of Fluid power system. Types of fluid power systems

-Basics of Hydraulics and Pneumatics. Hydraulic fluids- types and properties of hydraulic fluids.

Properties of air– Perfect Gas Laws, Pascal’s Law, Darcy’s equation, Valves and fittings. Losses

in pipes and fittings-K factor. Hydraulic and Pneumatic power packs.

UNIT II HYDRAULIC SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS 11

Sources of Hydraulic power- Pumping Theory – Pump Classification- Construction, Working,

Advantages, Disadvantages, Performance and Selection criterion of Linear& Rotary pumps.

Hydraulic Actuators - Cylinders & Motors - Types and construction. Control Components -

Directional control, Flow control and Pressure control valves- Types, Construction, Operation

and Applications. Fluid Power ANSI Symbol.

UNIT III DESIGN OF HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS 9

Accessories - Pressure Switches, Electrical switches, Limit switches, Relays – Applications.

Types of Accumulators and its Applications.

Design of Hydraulic circuits- Reciprocation, Speed control- meter-in & meter-out circuits,

Sequence, Synchronization, Regenerative, Pump Unloading-Double pump circuits. Pressure

Intensifier, Air-over oil system, Hydrostatic transmission, Electro hydraulic circuits and

Mechanical Hydraulic servo systems

UNIT IV PNEUMATIC SYSTEM AND COPONENTS 7

Compressors- types and working principle. Filter, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air control

Valves, Quick Exhaust valves, Pneumatic actuators, Servo systems. Introduction to Fluidics,

Pneumatic logic circuits.

UNIT V DESIGN OF INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC

CIRCUITS

11

Design of circuits using the components of hydraulic system for Drilling, Planning, Shaping,

Punching, Pressing operations. Sequential circuit design for simple application using cascade

method, Electro pneumatic circuits.

Selection of Hydraulic and Pneumatic components, Installation, fault finding and maintenance of

hydraulic and pneumatic components. Microprocessor and PLC- Applications in Hydraulic and

Pneumatics, Low cost Automation

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will learn the principles, basic laws, applications, advantages and disadvantages

74

of fluid power system.

2. Students will be able to acquire and understand the knowledge on the construction,

working and selection of different hydraulic components.

3. Students will apply the knowledge and design the basic hydraulic circuits for different

industrial applications.

4. Students will be able to acquire the knowledge on the construction, working and selection

of different pneumatic components & fluidic elements and apply them for designing the

basic industrial pneumatic circuits.

5. Students will acquire the knowledge on Electrohydraulic, microprocessor, PLC, and

design the hydraulic & pneumatic circuits for the automation of different industrial

processes.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Anthony Esposito, Fluid Power with Applications, Pearson Education, 7th edition, 2009.

2. James L. Jhonson, Introduction to Fluid Power, Delmar Thomson Learning, 2002.

REFERENCES :

1. Dudelyt, A Pease and John J.Pippenger, Basic Fluid Power, Prentice Hall, 1987.

2. Majumdar, S.R., Oil Hydraulics Systems-Principles and Maintenance, Tata McGraw-

Hill, 2001.

3. Majumdar, S.R., Pneumatic Systems-Principles and Maintenance, Tata McGraw-Hill,

2007.

4. Micheal J, Pinches and Ashby, J.G., Power Hydraulics, Prentice Hall, 1989.

5. ShanmugaSundaram, K.,Hydraulic and Pneumatic controls, S. Chand limited, 2006.

6. Srinivasan. R., Hydraulic and Pneumatic Control, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 2012.

E – RESOURCES

1. NPTEL Course - https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112105046/


75

ME18405 FLUID MECHANICS AND MACHINERY L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES:

This course imparts the basic knowledge of fluids in static, kinematic and dynamic

equilibrium.

They will also gain the knowledge of the applicability of physical laws in addressing

problems in hydraulics.

This course imparts the importance of various types of flow in pumps and turbines.

UNIT I FLUID PROPERTIES AND FLOW CHARACTERISTICS 12

Units and dimensions- Properties of fluids- mass density, specific weight, specific volume,

specific gravity, viscosity, compressibility, vapor pressure, surface tension and capillarity.

Pressure measurement devices - U-tube manometers, pressure gauges. Flow characteristics –

concept of control volume - applications of continuity equation, energy equation and

momentum equation

UNIT II FLOW THROUGH CIRCULAR CONDUITS 12

Hydraulic and energy gradient - Laminar flow through circular conduits and circular annuli-

Boundary layer concepts – types of boundary layer thickness – Darcy Weisbach equation –

friction factor- Moody diagram- commercial pipes- minor losses – Flow through pipes in series

and parallel.

UNIT III DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS 12

Need for dimensional analysis – methods of dimensional analysis – Similitude – types of

similitude - Dimensionless parameters- application of dimensionless parameters – Model

analysis.

UNIT IV PUMPS 12

Impact of jets - Euler’s equation - Theory of roto-dynamic machines – various efficiencies–

velocity components at entry and exit of the rotor- velocity triangles - Centrifugal pumps–

working principle - work done by the impeller - performance curves - Reciprocating pump-

working principle – Rotary pumps –classifications.

UNIT V TURBINES 12

Classification of turbines – heads and efficiencies – velocity triangles. Axial, radial and mixed

flow turbines. Pelton wheel, Francis turbine and Kaplan turbines- working principles - work

done by water on the runner – draft tube. Specific speed - unit quantities – performance curves

for turbines – governing of turbines.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

1. The students will be able to get a basic knowledge of fluids in static, kinematic and

dynamic equilibrium.

2. They will also gain the knowledge of the applicability of physical laws in addressing

problems in hydraulics.

76

3. They will also gain the knowledge of the applicability of dimensional analysis and

modeling.

4. The students will be able to critically analyse the performance of roto dynamic pumps

and reciprocating pumps.

5. The students will gain the knowledge of working of turbines and select the type of

turbine for an application.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bansal, R.K., “Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines”, 5th edition, Laxmi

Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2008

2. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Book House,

New Delhi, 2004.

REFERENCES:

1. Fox W.R. and McDonald A.T., Introduction to Fluid Mechanics John-Wiley and Sons,

Singapore, 1995.

2. Jain A. K. "Fluid Mechanics", Khanna Publishers, 2010

3. Roberson J.A and Crowe C.T., “Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Jaico Books Mumbai,

2000.

4. Streeter, V.L., and Wylie, E.B., “Fluid Mechanics”, McGraw Hill, 2000.

5. White, F.M., “Fluid Mechanics”, Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition, New Delhi, 2003.

77

ME18411 FLUID MECHANICS & MACHINERY LABORATORY L T P C 0 0 3 2

OBJECTIVES : 1. The students can able to have hands on experience in flow measurements using different

devices

2. The students can able to calculate the losses in pipes

3. The students can able to study the performance characteristic of pumps and turbines

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS 1 Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Orifice meter

2 Determination of the Coefficient of discharge of given Venturi meter

3 Calculation of the rate of flow using Rota meter

4 Determination of friction factor for a given set of pipe

5 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of centrifugal pump/

submersible pump

6 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of reciprocating pump

7 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Gear pump

8 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Pelton wheel

9 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristics curves of Francis turbine

10 Conducting experiments and drawing the characteristic curves of Kaplan turbine

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES 1. Ability to use the flow measurement equipment

2. Ability to do performance test on various pumps

3. Ability to do performance test on various turbines

REFERENCES : 1. Kumar K. L., "Engineering Fluid Mechanics", Eurasia Publishing House(p) Ltd., New Delhi,

2004

2. Modi P.N. and Seth, S.M. "Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics", Standard Book House, New

Delhi, 2004.

3. Robert W.Fox, Alan T. McDonald, Philip J.Pritchard, “Fluid Mechanics and Machinery”,

2011.

4. Streeter, V. L. and Wylie E. B., "Fluid Mechanics", McGraw Hill Publishing Co., 2010.



1 Orifice meter setup 1

2 Venturi meter setup 1

3 Rotameter setup 1

4 Pipe Flow analysis setup 1

5 Centrifugal pump/submersible pump setup 1

6 Reciprocating pump setup 1

7 Gear pump setup 1

8 Pelton wheel setup 1

9 Francis turbine setup 1

10 Kaplan turbine setup 1

78

ME18412 METAL MACHINING LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 2

OBJECTIVES

To Study and acquire knowledge on various basic machining operations in special

purpose machines and its applications in real life manufacture of components in the

industry.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS:

1. Contour milling using vertical milling machine

2. Spur gear cutting in milling machine

3. Helical Gear Cutting in milling machine

4. Gear generation in hobbing machine

5. Gear generation in gear shaping machine

6. Cylindrical grinding

7. Tool angle grinding with tool and Cutter Grinder

8. Measurement of cutting forces in Turning Process

9. Round to square using shaper

10. Round to hexagon using milling

11. Drilling and tapping in a radial drilling machine (Practice with and without drill jig)

Demonstration only (Not for exam)

1. External keyway cutting using planner

2. Centreless grinding

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

Ability to use different machine tools to manufacturing gears.

Ability to use different machine tools for finishing operations.

Ability to manufacture tools using cutter grinder.


1. Capstan Lathes 1 No.

2. Horizontal Milling Machine 2 Nos

3. Vertical Milling Machine 1 No.

4. Surface Grinding Machine 1 No.

5. Cylindrical Grinding Machine 2 Nos.

6. Lathe Tool Dynamometer 2 Nos.

7. Gear Hobbing Machine 1 No.

79

8. Gear Shaping machine 1 No.

9. 14 Centreless grinding machine 1 No.

10. Tool and cutter grinder 1 No.

11. Planner 1 No.

REFERENCES :

1. Hajra Choudhury, "Elements of Workshop Technology", Vol.II., Media Promoters.

2. Rao. P.N “Manufacturing Technology - Metal Cutting and Machine Tools", Tata

McGrawHill,New Delhi, 2003.

3. Richerd R Kibbe, John E. Neely, Roland O. Merges and Warren J.White

"Machine Tool Practices", Prentice Hall of India, 1998.

4. Geofrey Boothroyd, "Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools", Mc Graw

Hill, 1984.

80

ME18413 THERMAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY –I L T P C

0 0 3 2

OBJECTIVES :

1. To study the valve timing and performance of IC Engines

2. To Study the characteristics of fuels/Lubricants used in IC Engines

3. To study the Performance of steam generator and turbine

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Valve Timing and Port Timing diagrams.

2. Performance Test on 4 –stroke Petrol Engine/ Diesel Engine.

3. Heat Balance Test on 4–stroke Diesel Engine.

4. Morse Test on Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine.

5. Retardation Test on a Diesel Engine.

6. Determination of Flash Point and Fire Point of various fuels / Viscosity of lubricating oil.

7. Performance, combustion and emission Test on 4 –stroke Diesel Engine.

STEAM LAB

8. Study on Steam Generators and Turbines.

9. Performance and Energy Balance Test on a Steam Generator.

10. Steam Calorimeter to find quality of steam.

11. Performance Test on Steam Turbine.

12. Performance Test on Steam Condenser.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES

The student will be familiar with the port and valve timing diagram

The student can demonstrate the characteristics of fuels/Lubricants used in IC Engines.

Analyse the performance of petrol and diesel engine.

Students will know how to determine the combustion and emission characteristics of

diesel engine.

Students will know the Performance test on steam generator and steam turbines.

REFERENCES :

1. Rajupt. R.K., "Thermal Engineering", Laxmi Publications, Tenth Edition, 2017.

2. Kothandaraman. C.P., Domkundwar. S, Domkundwar. A.V., "A Course In Thermal

Engineering", Fifth Edition, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, 2002.

3. Ganesan.V, "Internal Combustion Engines", Third Edition, Tata Mcgraw-Hill, 2007.

4. Rudramoorthy, R, "Thermal Engineering", Tata Mcgraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2003.

81



1. I.C Engine –2 stroke and 4 stroke model 1

2. Apparatus for Flash and Fire Point 1

3. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with mechanical loading 1

4. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with hydraulic loading 1

5. 4-stroke Diesel Engine with electrical loading 1

6. Multi-cylinder Petrol Engine 1

7. Single cylinder Petrol Engine 1

8. Data Acquisition system with any one of the above engines 1

9 Steam Boiler with turbine setup 1

82

SEMESTER V

ME 18501 METROLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To define accuracy, precision, calibration, sensitivity, repeatability and relevant

terms in metrology.

To provide knowledge on various metrological equipment available to measure

the dimensions of the components and process parameters.

To provide knowledge on quality and control process.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO METROLOGY & LINEAR

MEASUREMENTS

9

Introduction to Metrology – Basics - Need – Precision and Accuracy, Errors in Measurements,

Comparators – Mechanical, Electrical & Optical. Interchangeability - limits, fits and

tolerances, Limit gauges, Taylor's principle of gauge design. Calibration, Sensitivity,

readability & repeatability. Linear measurement - Vernier calipers – Vernier height gauge-

Vernier depth gauge - Micrometers – Digital calipers - Slip gauges.

UNIT II ANGULAR AND FORM MEASUREMENTS 9

Angular Measurement - Angular measuring instruments – Types – Bevel protractor, Spirit

levels, Sine bar – Sine center – Sine table – Angle Dekkor - Autocollimator.

Form Measurement - Measurement of surface finish – Surf Tester. Screw thread measurement

– Minor diameter & Effective diameter – Two wire method. Gear measurement - Gear

terminology - Errors in gears – Pitch & Tooth thickness measurement - Parkinson's gear tester.

UNIT III ADVANCES IN METROLOGY 9

Interferometry – Types of Interferometers – Michelson interferometer – NPL flatness

interferometer. Laser metrology - Basic concept of lasers - Advantages of Laser – Laser

Interferometers – Types – DC and AC lasers interferometer – Applications. Coordinate

Measuring Machines - Types of construction – Probes. CNC CMM, Machine vision system –

Image acquisition & Image processing.

UNIT IV MEASUREMENT OF PROCESS PARAMETERS 9

Measurement of Force – Load cells – Hydraulic & Pneumatic load cells – LVDT. Basics of

Torque & Power measurement. Flow measurement – Differential pressure flow meter,

Magnetic flow meter – Ultrasonic flow meter. Temperature measurement - Thermocouples –

Radiation pyrometer – Infrared temperature sensor.

UNIT V QUALITY CONTROL 9

Quality – Definitions - Meaning of quality of product & services - Quality of conformance &

Quality of performance. ISO 9000 Series & other standards, necessity of ISO certification.

Statistical Quality Control – Meaning and importance of SQC, Control charts for variables – X

& R charts, Acceptance Sampling.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Apply knowledge of linear and angular measurements and effective communication for

engineering practice

83

2. Apply knowledge of form measurements with effective communication for engineering

application

3. Apply the knowledge to study the metrology of gears and screw threads.

4. Examine the variability of process using control charts

5. Apply knowledge to sampling acceptance method.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Jain R.K “Engineering Metrology”, Khanna Publishers, 21st edition, 2005.

2. Gupta. I.C., “Engineering Metrology”, 7th edition, Dhanpatrai Publication, 2012.

REFERENCES :

1. Charles Reginaid shotbolt, “Metrology for Engineers”, 5th edition, Cengage Learning

EMEA,1990

2. Beckwith, Maragoni & Lienhard, “Mechanical Measurements”, Pearson Education, 6th

edition, 2007.

3. Mahajan M, “Textbook of Metrology”, Dhanpat Rai & Co (p) Ltd, 2010.

4. Juran U. M and Gryna, “ Quality Planning and analysis”, Tata McGraw Hill

5. Logothetis N, “Managing for Total Quality”, Prentice-Hall, Delhi

WEB RESOURCES :

1. http://home.iitk.ac.in/~nsinha/Metrology.pdf

http://home.iitk.ac.in/~nsinha/Metrology.pdf

84

ME 18502 DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES :

To impart knowledge on the fundamental force-motion relationship in components

subjected to external forces and analysis of standard mechanisms.

To determine the undesirable effects of imbalances resulting from prescribed motions in

mechanism.

To inculcate the concepts of vibration and damping principles

To identify the undesirable effect of vibrations and its controlling procedures.

To understand the principles in mechanisms used for speed control and stability control

UNIT I FORCE ANALYSIS 12

Dynamic force analysis – Inertia force and Inertia torque– D Alembert’s principle –Dynamic

Analysis in Slider Crank Mechanism – Turning moment diagrams –Fluctuation of Energy and

Speed, Weight of Flywheel required.

UNIT II BALANCING OF MASSES 12

Dynamic balancing – Balancing of rotating masses under single and several planes –

Balancing of reciprocating masses - Primary and secondary forces and couples– Balancing of

linkages.

UNIT III FREE VIBRATION 12

Basic features of vibratory systems – Degrees of freedom – single degree of freedom – Free

vibration – Equations of motion – Natural frequency – Types of Damping – Damped

vibration– Critical speeds of shafts – Dunkerley Method- Torsional vibration of shaft –

Torsional vibration – Two rotor Torsional systems.

UNIT IV FORCED VIBRATION AND MESUREMENT 12

Response of one-degree freedom systems to periodic forcing – Harmonic disturbances –

Disturbance caused by unbalance – Support motion –transmissibility – Vibration Isolation-

General considerations in vibration measurement-vibration pickups.

UNIT V CONTROL MECHANISMS 12

Governors – Types – Centrifugal governors – Gravity controlled and spring controlled

Centrifugal governors – Characteristics – Gyroscopes –Gyroscopic forces– Gyroscopic effects

in Automobiles, Ships and Airplanes.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will compete to evaluate the dynamic forces acting on the elements of the

mechanisms.

2. The students will be proficient to analyze the unbalancing in reciprocating and rotating

masses

3. The Students will be able to evaluate the natural frequency of free vibration and its

damping coefficient.

85

4. The Students will be skillful to interpret and apply the concept of vibration

transmissibility and isolation.

5. The Students will be capable to analyze the controlling principles of Gyroscopes and

Governors

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Rao,S.S, “Mechanical Vibrations,” Pearson Education, Fifth Edition, 2011.

2. Rattan, S.S, “Theory of Machines”, Tata McGraw-Hill, Fourth Edition, 2017.

3. Sadhu Singh,“Theory of Machines: Kinematics and Dynamics”,Pearson Education,

Third edition, 2011.

4. Uicker, J.J., Pennock G.R and Shigley, J.E., “Theory of Machines and Mechanisms”,

Oxford University Press, Fifth Edition,2017.

REFERENCES :

1. Ghosh. A and Mallick, A.K., “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines", East-West Pvt.

Ltd., New Delhi, 2008.

2. Grover. G.T., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Nem Chand and Bros., 2009

3. Khurmi, R.S., “Theory of Machines”, S Chand Publications, 2005.

4. RaoJ.S. and DukkipatiR.V. "Mechanisms and Machine Theory", Wiley-Eastern Ltd.,

New Delhi, 1992.

5. Thomas Bevan, "Theory of Machines", CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2009.

WEBRESOURCES :


2. https://freevideolectures.com/course/2364/dynamics-of-machines/

3. https://cosmolearning.org/courses/dynamics-of-machines/

4. https://www.edx.org/course/machine-dynamics-with-matlab-3/


https://freevideolectures.com/course/2364/dynamics-of-machines

https://cosmolearning.org/courses/dynamics-of-machines/

86

ME18503 DESIGN OF MACHINE ELEMENTS L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES:

This course will impart the knowledge on various types of stress and selection of

materials

This course will make acquainted design principles of shaft and fits and tolerances.

This course will familiarize the design principles of springs under dynamic and static

conditions.

This course will enable to check strength of fasteners –Rivet, bolts and welding.

This course will facilitate to select and examine the rolling and sliding contact bearings

(Use of PSG Design Data Book is Permitted)

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO DESIGN PROCESS AND STRESSES IN

MACHINE ELEMENTS

14

Design Process- Factors influencing machine design-Selection of materials based on mechanical

properties-types of Stress- Calculation of principle stresses for various load combinations-

eccentric loading-Factor of Safety-Stress concentration factor - Theories of failures- Design for

variable loading -Cyclic stresses-Notch sensitivity - Fatigue stress concentration factor-

Introduction to fracture mechanics

UNIT II SHAFTS, KEYS, COUPLINGS AND FITS AND TOLERANCE 12

Preferred Numbers- Standardization- Design of shafts under static and fatigue loadings, Keys –

type of keys -design of keys- Design of Rigid coupling and Flexible coupling -Fits and

Tolerances- Types of fits- Hole basis system and Shaft basis system

UNIT III SPRING DESIGN 12

Design of Close coil helical springs under varying load condition. Design of Leaf spring, Disc

Spring and Torsion spring

UNIT IV DESIGN FOR RIVETED, WELDING AND BOLTED JOINTS 12

Riveting – Types of rivet joints, Caulking and fullering, Design of riveted joints for structural

and pressure vessels. Eccentrically loaded riveted joint-Welding – Welding symbols, Design of

welded joints under eccentric loading-Geometry of thread forms-Terminology of screw threads-

Design of bolted joints.

UNIT V BEARINGS 10

Sliding contact and rolling contact bearings – Design of sliding contact bearings-Introduction to

Elasto hydrodynamic lubrication - Journal Bearings. - Selection of Rolling Contact bearings.

TOTAL: 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

1. The students will be proficient to apply the design process, material selection, and

calculation of stresses under static and variable loading conditions with the effect of

stress concentrations.

2. The Students will be capable to analyze and apply the design of solid, hollow shafts keys

and couplings. Also understand the knowledge of fits and tolerance and its analysis

87

3. The students will learn and analyze the close coil helical springs under variable loading.

Also will acquire the knowledge of leaf, disc and torsion springs.

4. Students will be able to understand and evaluate the design of riveted joint and welding

joints under eccentric loading.

5. The Students will apply design knowledge on sliding and rolling contact bearing and will

learn the basics of EHD Journal Bearing

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bhandari V.B, “Design of Machine Element”, TMH Publications. 3rd edition, New Delhi,

2017.

2. Sundararajamoorthy, T.V. and Shanmugam, N., “Machine Design”, Anuradha Agencies,

Chennai, 2003.

3. Shigley, J.E., Charles, R.M. and Richard, G.B., “Mechanical Engineering Design”,

McGraw-Hill, New Delhi, 2014.

REFERENCES :

1. Khurmi R.S., and Gupta J.K., “Machine Design”, S Chand & Co, New Delhi, 14th Edition

2005.

2. Lingaiah K., “Machine Design Data Book”, Tata McGraw – Hill, New Delhi, 2010.

3. Robort.L.Norton,” Machine Design”, Pearson Publisher, New Delhi, 5th Edition, 2018.

4. Sharma P.C and D.K Sharma, “Machine Design”, Agrawal - Kataria and Sons

Publications. NewDelhi, 2014.

5. Spotts M.F., “Design of Machine Elements”, Pearson Education, NewDelhi, 8th Edition,

2019

WEBRESOURCES:

1. http://www.mhhe.com/bhandari/dme3e

2. https://www.machinedesign.com › basics-design › hydrodynamic-bearings

3. https://fac.ksu.edu.sa › sites › default › files › mechanical-disgin-shigley.

4. www.iitbbs.ac.in › cur › btech.

88

ME 18504 HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER L T P C

(Use of standard HMT data book permitted)

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the mechanisms of heat transfer under steady and transient conditions.

To study the heat transfer rate for laminar and turbulent flows

To calculate radiative heat fluxes between surfaces of simple geometries

To learn the thermal analysis and sizing of heat exchangers and to understand the basic

Concepts of mass transfer.

UNIT I CONDUCTION 12

General Differential equation of Heat Conduction–Cartesian and Polar Coordinates–One

Dimensional Steady State Heat Conduction ––Plane and Composite Systems –Conduction with

Internal Heat Generation –Extended Surfaces –Unsteady Heat Conduction –Lumped Analysis –

Infinite Solids –Use of Heusler’s charts.

UNIT II CONVECTION 12

Free and Forced Convection -Hydrodynamic and Thermal Boundary Layer. Free and Forced

Convection during external flow over Plates and Cylinders, non circular cross section and

Internal flow through tubes flow, across banks of tubes, on circular cross section.

UNIT III PHASE CHANGE HEAT TRANSFER AND HEAT

EXCHANGERS

12

Nusselt’s theory of condensation-Regimes of Pool boiling and Flow boiling. Correlations in

boiling and condensation. Heat Exchanger Types -Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient –Fouling

Factors -Analysis –LMTD method -NTU method.

UNIT IV RADIATION 12

Black Body Radiation –Gray body radiation - Shape Factor algebra –Electrical Analogy –

Radiation Shields. Radiation through gases.

UNIT V MASS TRANSFER 12

Basic Concepts –Diffusion Mass Transfer –Fick’s Law of Diffusion –Steady state Molecular

Diffusion –Convective Mass Transfer –Momentum, Heat and Mass Transfer Analogy–

Convective Mass Transfer Correlations.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Student will understand the concepts of heat transfer in steady, transient and infinite

solids.

2. Students will be capable to evaluate the heat transfer coefficients for natural and forced

convection.

3. Students will apply the concepts of heat transfer in heat exchanger, boiling and

condensation phenomenon.

4. Student can determine the radiation in black body and grey body and in gases.

5. Student will analyse the mass transfer occurring in both diffusion and convection mode

89

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Frank P. Incropera and David P. Dewitt, "Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer",

John Wiley & Sons, 8th Edition, 2018.

2. Yunus A. Cengel, "Heat Transfer A Practical Approach", Tata McGraw Hill, 5th Edition,

2015.

REFERENCES:

1. Ghoshdastidar,P.S, "Heat Transfer", Oxford University Press , 2012

2. Holman, J.P., "Heat and Mass Transfer", Tata McGraw Hill, 7th edition,2010

3. Kothandaraman, C.P., "Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer", New Age

International, New Delhi, 1998.

4. Nag, P.K., "Heat Transfer", Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,3rd edition 2011

5. Ozisik, M.N., "Heat Transfer", McGraw Hill Book Company., 1994.

6. Sachdeva, R.C. Fundamentals of Engineering Heat Transfer, New Age Science Ltd.,

New Delhi; 4th edition, 2009.

7. Thirumaleshwar. M : Fundamentals of Heat and Mass Transfer, "Heat and Mass

Transfer", First Edition, Dorling Kindersley,2009.

8. Venkateshan. S.P, “Heat Transfer", Ane Books, New Delhi, 2004.

9. Yadav, R., "Heat and Mass Transfer", Central Publishing House, 1995.

WEB RESOURCES:

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112101097/1121081491/112104159/103105052.

https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112101097/1121081491/112104159

90

ME18511 DYNAMICS AND VIBRATION LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES :

To get exposure into the principles learnt in kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery.

To understand how certain measuring devices are used for dynamic and Vibration testing.

To determine the natural frequencies of the equivalent systems.

To get familiar with the various motion controlling principles and its applications.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Determination of Mass moment of inertia and Radius of Gyration of Fly wheel and Axle

system

2. Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia and Gyration of Symmetric bodies using Turn

Table apparatus

3. Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia and Radius of Gyration using

a) Bifilar suspension b) Trifilar Suspension

4. Determination of Mass Moment of Inertia and Radius of Gyration using compound

pendulum

5. Motorized gyroscope – Study of gyroscopic couple effect

6. Governor - Determination of range sensitivity, effort etc., for Watts, Porter, Proell, and

Hartnell Governors. (Any two Governor).

7. Cams – Cam profile drawing and study of jump phenomenon

8. Verification of Torsion equilibrium using Epicyclic Gear Train

9. Balancing of rotating masses

10. Single degree of freedom Spring Mass System – Determination of natural Frequency

11. Determination of torsional natural frequency of single Rotor systems under Undamped

and Damped condition.

12. Whirling of shafts – Determination of critical speeds of shafts

13. Transverse vibration of Free-Free beam – with concentrated masses using Dunkerley’s

Principle.

14. Forced Vibration of Cantilever beam under damped and undamped conditions

15. Determination of material damping under Free Vibration condition using standard

Impulse hammer test.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

NOTE:

From the above listed experiments, considering the aim and measuring parameter as a

guideline, twelve experiments can be framed for a semester.

Among them 1, 5,6,7,8,9,10 are to be included compulsory.

OUTCOMES

1. Students will demonstrate the principles of dynamics of machinery.

2. Students will be able to use the measuring devices for dynamic testing.

91

3. Students will be capable of determining the natural frequencies of various systems.

4. Students will appraise the concept of motion controlling systems in real time applications.

REFERENCES :

1. Laboratory Manual Prepared by Department of Mechanical Engineering

92

ME 18512 METROLOGY AND INSTRUMENTATION

LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES:

To gain the practical knowledge on linear, angular measuring instruments and Comparators.

To study the features of Coordinate measuring machine for linear, angular and form

measurements.

To understand the errors involved in force, temperature and torque measurements.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Calibration of measuring instruments: Vernier caliper/ Micrometer/ Dial gauge/ Vernier

height gauge/ Bevel protector.

2. Measurement of industrial components using comparators: Mechanical / Electrical /

Pneumatic comparator

3. Measurement of Angle: Profile projector/ sin bar/ sine center/ Tool maker’s microscope

4. Measurement of Bore diameter: Bore Dial gauge /Telescopic gauge

5. Straightness measurement using Autocollimator

6. Linear and angular measurement using CMM

7. Screw thread measurement using Floating Carriage Micrometer.

8. Measurement of Chordal width and Chordal addendum of spur gear using Gear Tooth

Vernier Caliper.

9. Measurement of flatness using Autocollimator/Optical interferometer

10. i) Force Measurement using Proving Ring.

ii) Torque Measurement using Torque measuring equipment.

11. Temperature measurement: Thermocouple/Thermistor /RTD

12. Form measurement of complex specimen using Coordinate Measuring Machine

13. Measurement of surface roughness using Surface Finish Measuring Equipment.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES

1. Students will calibrate the linear and angular measuring instruments and able to analyze

with comparators.

2. Ability to measure the various measurements of threads and gears using different form

measuring instruments

3. Students can understand the working principle and function of coordinate measuring

machine and surface measuring instruments.

4. Students will find the errors in various force, torque and temperature measuring

instruments.

REFERENCES :

1. Metrology and Instrumentation Laboratory Manual Prepared by Faculty of Mechanical

93

Engineering, Sri Venkateswara College of Engineering.

2. Prof.[Dr.] Dalgobind Mahto, “Metrology and Industrial Inspection Lab Manual” 2011.

94

ME 18513 Heat Transfer, Refrigeration & Air conditioning

Laboratory L T P C

0 0 3 1.5

OBJECTIVES :

To enable the students to apply conduction, convection and radiation heat transfer concept

to practical application.

To study the performance of refrigeration and air conditioning system/components/cycle

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

I HEAT TRANSFER LAB: 30 PERIODS

1 Thermal conductivity measurement of pipe insulation using lagged pipe apparatus.

2 Determination of heat transfer coefficient under natural convection from a vertical

Cylinder.

3 Determination of heat transfer coefficient under forced convection from inside tube

4 Determination of Thermal conductivity of composite wall.

5 Determination of Thermal conductivity of insulating powder

6 Heat transfer from pin -fin apparatus (natural & forced convection modes

7 Determination of Stefan –Boltzmann constant

8 Determination of emissivity of a gray surface

9 Effectiveness of Parallel / counter flow heat exchanger

10 Performance test on a reciprocating air compressor

II REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING LAB 15 PERIODS

1 Determination of COP of a refrigeration system

2 Performance test on Air conditioning system

3 Performance test on a HC Refrigeration System

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES

1. To acquire practical knowledge on working principles of refrigeration and air conditioning

system.

2. To get hands on experience on working principles of air compressor, heat exchanger

equipment.

3. To obtain practical familiarity on operation of conductive, convective and radiation heat

transfer apparatus

REFERENCES :

1. Mathur. R.B. and R.P. Sharma, "Internal Combustion Engines"., Dhanpat Rai & Sons 2007.

2. Ramalingam. K.K., "Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals", Scitech Publications,

2002.

95

3. Ganesan, "Internal Combustion Engines", II Edition, TMH, 2002.

4. R. C. Sachdeva, Fundamentals of Engineering Heat Transfer, New Age Science Ltd., New

Delhi; Year: 2009

5. Thermal Engineering Laboratory Manual prepared by Faculty of Mechanical Engineering,

96

SEMESTER VI

ME 18601 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

The purpose of this course is to make the students to get familiarized with various

computer aided tools that can be implemented in design and manufacturing.

This course will provide knowledge on Geometric Modelling and Visual Realism.

To provide an overview of how computers are being used in mechanical component

design and its manufacturing.


Product cycle- Design process- sequential and concurrent engineering- Computer aided design

– CAD system architecture- Computer graphics – co-ordinate systems- 2D and 3D

transformations- homogeneous coordinates – Line drawing -Clipping- viewing transformation

UNIT II GEOMETRIC MODELING 9

Representation of curves- Hermite curve- Bezier curve- B-spline curves-rational curves-

Techniques for surface modeling – surface patch- Coons and bicubic patches- Bezier and B-

spline surfaces. Solid modeling techniques- CSG and B-rep.

UNIT III VISUAL REALISM 9

Hidden – Line-Surface-Solid Removal Algorithms – Shading – Coloring – Engineering

Animation.

UNIT IV CAD STANDARDS 9

Standards for computer graphics- Graphical Kernel System (GKS) – standards for exchange

images- Open Graphics Library (OpenGL) – Data exchange standards – IGES, STEP, CALS

etc. – communication standards.

UNIT V COMPUTER AIDED MANUFACTURING 9

Introduction to NC systems and CNC – Machine axis and Co-ordinate system- CNC machine

tools-Principle of operation CNC- Construction features including structure- Drives and CNC

controllers - Introduction of Part Programming, – Detailed Manual part programming using

FANUC on Lathe & Milling machines using G codes and M codes- Introduction of CAM

package.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

The students will be able to

1. Students will be able to demonstrate basic ideas in CAD and CAM Packages.

2. Students will classify the suitable curves for mechanical components.

3. Students will Identify the various standards involved in Computer graphics and CAD

software.

4. Students will demonstrate the standards used for Computer Aided Modelling.

5. Students will be able to discover the concepts of advanced manufacturing techniques

and CAM software.

97

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Agoston and Max K, “Computer Graphics & Geometric Modeling”, Springer-Verlag

London Limited, 2005.

2. Gerald Farin, “Curves and Surfaces for CAGD - A Practical Guide”, Morgan-

Kaufmann, 2002.

3. Ibrahim Zeid “Mastering CAD CAM” Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Co.2009 2.

Donald Hearn and M. Pauline Baker “Computer Graphics with open GL”, 4th Edition,

Prentice Hall, Inc., 2014.

4. Mikell P. Groover, Emory W. Zimmer, CAD/CAM Computer Aided Design &

Manufacturing, Pearson Education, 1st edition, 2003

5. Rao. P.N “CAD/CAM Principles & Applications”, TMH Publications, 3rd edition,

2010

REFERENCES:

1. Chris McMahon and Jimmie Browne “CAD/CAM Principles", "Practice and

Manufacturing management” Second Edition, Pearson Education, 1999.

2. Foley, Wan Dam, Feiner and Hughes - "Computer graphics principles & practice"

Pearson Education - 2003.

3. Jayanta Sarkar “Computer Aided Design: A Conceptual Approach” CRC Press, 2014.

4. Shah J J and Mantyla M, “Parametric and Feature-based CAD/CAM”, John Wiley &

Sons, New York, 1995.

5. William M Neumann and Robert F. Sproul “Principles of Computer Graphics”,

McGraw Hill Book Co. Singapore, 1989.

WEB RESOURCES :

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/102/112102102/


https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112/102/112102102/


98

ME 18602 DESIGN OF TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES:

To gain knowledge on the principles and procedure for the design of flexible elements.

To understand and familiarize the standard procedure available for Design of cylindrical

gears.

Insight the standard procedure available for Design of bevel and worm gear drives.

To impart the knowledge on gears in the design of gear box.

To enhance the practicing in design of clutches and brakes.

(Use of PSG Design Data Book permitted)

UNIT I DESIGN OF FLEXIBLE ELEMENTS 12

Design of Flat belts and pulleys - Selection of V belts and pulleys – Selection of hoisting wire

ropes and pulleys – Design of Transmission chains and Sprockets.

UNIT II SPUR GEARS AND PARALLEL AXIS HELICAL GEARS 12

Speed ratios and number of teeth -Force analysis -Tooth stresses - Dynamic effects –

Fatigue strength - Factor of safety - Gear materials – Design of straight tooth spur & helical

gears based on strength and wear considerations – Pressure angle in the normal and

transverse plane- Equivalent number of teeth-forces for helical gears

UNIT III BEVEL AND WORM GEARS 12

Straight bevel gear: Tooth terminology, tooth forces and stresses, equivalent number of teeth.

Estimating the dimensions of pair of straight bevel gears. Worm Gear: Merits and demerits

Terminology. Thermal capacity, materials-forces and stresses, efficiency, estimating the size of

the worm gear pair.

UNIT IV GEAR BOXES 12

Geometric progression - Standard step ratio - Ray diagram, kinematics layout -Design of sliding

mesh gear box - Design of multi speed gear box for machine tool applications - Constant mesh

gear box Speed reducer unit. – Variable speed gear box for automotive applications.

UNIT V CLUTCHES AND BRAKES 12

Design of plate clutches –axial clutches - cone clutches - internal expanding rim clutches,

Electromagnetic clutches. Band and Block brakes - external shoe brakes – Internal expanding

shoe brake.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will be able to understand the principles and procedure for the design of

flexible elements.

2. The students will apply the design procedure for spur and helical gear drives using the

manufacturer’s catalogue.

3. The students will analyze the bevel and worm gear drive design by adopting the

manufacturer’s catalogue

4. The students will be capable to execute design methodology for gear box.

5. The students will implement the design principles of clutches and brakes using the

manufacturer’s catalogue.

99

TEXT BOOKS: 1. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co, 4th Edition,

2016.

2. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett “Mechanical

Engineering Design”, Tata McGraw-Hill, 10th Edition, 2015

REFERENCES :

1. Alfred Hall, Halowenko, A and Laughlin, H., “Machine Design”, Tata McGraw-

Hill Book Co.(Schaum’s Outline), 2010.

2. Ansel Ugural, “Mechanical Design – An Integral Approach", Tata McGrawHill Book Co,

2nd Edition, 2015.

3. Bernard Hamrock, Steven Schmid, Bo Jacobson, “Fundamentals of Machine Elements”,

Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co., 3rd Edition, 2014.

4. Jindal, U.C., “Machine Design-Design of Transmission System", Dorling Kindersley,

2010.

5. Merhyle F. Spotts, Terry E. Shoup and Hornberger, Lee. E, “Design of Machine

Elements”, Printice Hall, 8th Edition, 2003.

6. Prabhu, T.J., “Design of Transmission Elements”, Mani Offset, Chennai, 2000.

7. Robert C. Juvinall and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Design”, Wiley,

2013.

8. Sundararajamoorthy, T.V and Shanmugam.N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha

Publications, Chennai, 2003.

WEB RESOURCES:




100

ME 18603 GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the basic difference between incompressible and compressible flow.

To understand the phenomenon of shock waves and its effect on flow.

To gain some basic Knowledge about jet propulsion and Rocket Propulsion.

(Use of Standard Gas Tables permitted)

UNIT I BASIC CONCEPTS AND ISENTROPIC FLOWS 12

Energy and momentum equations of compressible fluid flows – Stagnation states, Mach waves

and Mach cone – Effect of Mach number on compressibility – Isentropic flow through variable

ducts – Nozzle and Diffusers, Design of inlets nozzles and Diffusers

UNIT II FLOW THROUGH DUCTS 12

Flows through constant area ducts with heat transfer (Rayleigh flow), Slope of Rayleigh line,

and Friction (Fanno flow) Slope of Fanno line– Flows through constant area ducts in a

isothermal flow-variation of flow properties.

UNIT III NORMAL AND OBLIQUE SHOCKS 12

Governing equations –Variation of flow parameters across the normal and oblique shocks –

Prandtl –Meyer relations, Rankine-Hugoniot equations, Strength of the shock–Applications.

UNIT IV JET PROPULSION 12

Theory of jet propulsion –Thrust equation –Thrust power and propulsive efficiency –

Operating principle, cycle analysis and performance characteristics of ram jet, turbojet,

turbofan and turbo prop engines, Aircraft matching.

UNIT V SPACE PROPULSION 12

Types of rocket engines – Propellants feeding systems – Theory of rocket propulsion –

Performance study – Terminal and characteristic velocity – Applications – space flights.-

Rocket equations – Escape and Orbital velocity.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will solve the simple compressible flow problems and also understand the

effect of compressibility in nozzles and diffusers, design criteria of nozzles and

diffusers

2. Student will apply governing equations to compressible flow through constant area

duct with friction and heat transfer.

3. Students will evaluate the compressible flow having normal and oblique shock.

4. Student will analyze the propulsion methods, concepts of aircraft propulsion system

and performance of the jet.

5. Student will apply the concepts of gas dynamics in space propulsion system.

101

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Anderson, J.D., "Modern Compressible flow” 3rd Edition, McGraw Hill, 2003.

2. Yahya, S.M. "Fundamentals of Compressible Flow" , New Age International (P)

Limited, New Delhi, 6th edition,2016.

REFERENCES :

1. Babu. V., "Fundamentals of Gas Dynamics", ANE Books India, 2008.

2. Cohen. H., G.E.C. Rogers and Saravanamutto, "Gas Turbine Theory", Longman Group

Ltd.,1980.

3. Ganesan. V., "Gas Turbines", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi,1999.

4. Hill. P. and C. Peterson, "Mechanics and Thermodynamics of Propulsion" , Addison –

Wesley Publishing company, 1992.

5. Somasundaram. PR.S.L., "Gas Dynamics and Jet Propulsions", New Age International

Publishers, 1996.

6. Sutton. G.P., "Rocket Propulsion Elements", John wiley,New York,1986,.

7. Shapiro. A.H.,"Dynamics and Thermodynamics of Compressible fluid Flow", John

Wiley, New York, 1953.

8. Zucrow. N.J., "Aircraft and Missile Propulsion", Vol.1 & II, John Wiley, 1975.

9. Zucrow. N.J., "Principles of Jet Propulsion and Gas Turbines”, John Wiley, New York,

1970.

WEB RESOURCES :

1. https://nptel.ac.in/courses/112103021/101106044/112106166

102

ME 18611 DESIGN AND FABRICATION PROJECT L T P C

0 0 4 2

OBJECTIVES :

To apply the knowledge acquired from core courses to get practical experience on design

and fabrication processes.

GUIDELINES

1. The students may be grouped into 2 to 4 and work under a project supervisor.

2. A particular domain / field shall be selected by the students in consultation with their

supervisor.

3. The students shall be encouraged to attend a design thinking workshop / opportunity

identification session / problem statement writing.

4. Then, the device / system / component(s) to be fabricated, may be decided in consultation

with the supervisor and if possible with an industry.

5. The specifications device / system / component(s) to be arrived by following / doing

design calculations.

6. The appropriate manufacturing process(es) to be identified.

7. The students shall prepare time schedule to complete the project.

8. The progress of the fabrication / development of the device / system / component(s) shall

be reviewed at intermediate stages by means of conducting reviews for which internal

assessment mark will be awarded.

9. At the end of the semester examination, the project work shall be evaluated based on oral

presentation, demonstration of the working model and the project report jointly by

external and internal examiners.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES

1. The students will apply the design principle for developing a mechanical device /system /

components.

2. Will apply the manufacturing techniques to fabricate the working model.

103

ME 18612 COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING

LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2

OBJECTIVES :

To gain practical experience in handling 2D drafting and 3D modelling software systems.

To study the features of CNC Machine Tool.

To expose students to modern control system (Fanuc)

To know the application of various CNC machines like CNC lathe, CNC Vertical

Machining centre, CNC EDM and CNC wire-cut and studying of Rapid prototyping

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

I 3D GEOMETRIC MODELLING 32 hours

1. Introduction of 3D Modelling software

Creation of 3D assembly model of following machine elements using 3D Modelling

software

2. Extrusion

3. Revolving

4. Blend

5. Sweep Blend

6. Flange Coupling

7. Plummer Block

8. Introduction of CNC Milling code generation

9. Kinematics mechanism in Assembly

II MANUAL PART PROGRAMMING 28 Hours

11. Part Programming - CNC Machining Centre

a) Linear Cutting.

b) Circular cutting.

c) Cutter Radius Compensation.

d) Canned Cycle Operations.

12. Part Programming - CNC Turning Centre

a) Straight, Taper and Radius Turning.

b) Thread Cutting.

c) Rough and Finish Turning Cycle.

d) Drilling and Tapping Cycle

13. Computer Aided Part Programming

a) CL Data and Post process generation using CAM packages.

b) Application of CAPP in Machining and Turning Centre

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

NOTE:

1. From the above listed experiments, considering the modelling and part programming as a

guideline, twelve experiments can be framed for a semester

104

OUTCOMES

1. The Students will be able to sketch and interpret the Components based on dimensions.

2. The Students will be able to develop and correlate 3D parts in a Component Assembly.

3. The Students will be able to develop CNC programming and perform manufacturing using

CAM software

REFERENCES :

1. Creo Parametric 4.0 Tutorial by Roger Toogood, SDC Publications, 2017.

2. CAD / CAM Laboratory Manual Prepared by Faculty of Mechanical Engineering, Sri

Venkateswara College of Engineering

105

SEMESTER VII

ME 18701 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES :

To enable the students, understand the mathematical and physical principles underlying the

Finite Element Method (FEM) as applied to solid mechanics, heat transfer and fluid flow

problems.

To teach the students, the characteristics of various elements and selection of suitable

elements for the problems being solved.

To make the students derive finite element equations for simple and complex elements.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO FINITE ELEMENT METHOD 12

General description of Finite Element Method - General procedure of FEM - Applications of

FEM – FEA softwares. General field problems, Discrete and continuous models, Variational

formulation in finite elements – Ritz method - Weighted residual methods – Galerkin – sub

domain – Method of least squares and collocation method - numerical problems

UNIT II APPLICATIONS IN STRUCTURES 12

One dimensional elasticity – Castigliano’s first theorem – Principle of minimum potential energy

- Linear spring - Elastic bar with constant and varying cross sections using linear and quadratic

elements – Truss structures and Beams.

UNIT III APPLICATIONS IN PLANE ELASTICITY 12

Introduction to plane elasticity theory – Plane stress, Plane strain and Axisymmetric problems –

Finite Element formulations of plane elasticity problems using CST and four noded quadrilateral

elements only

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS IN HEAT TRANSFER AND VIBRATION 12

Finite Element formulation of One-dimensional and Two-dimensional steady state heat

conduction problems with convection - Simple elements only

Longitudinal vibration frequencies and mode shapes. Fourth Order Beam Equation –Transverse

deflections and Natural frequencies of beams

UNIT V ISOPARAMETRIC FORMULATION 12

Iso, Sub & Super parametric element, shape functions for four noded, eight noded and nine

noded rectangular elements – Numerical Integration-Gaussian quadrature -Matrix solution

techniques - Solutions Techniques to Dynamic problems - Introduction to Analysis Software.

TOTAL :60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will learn the principles involved in discretization in finite element

approach.

2. The students will be able to deduce finite element equations for simple elements and can

apply the knowledge of mathematics and engineering to solve structural 1D problems.

3. The students will connect the application of FEM in 2D Plane elasticity.

4. The students will be able to predict the changes that occur for Thermal and vibration

106

applications.

5. The students will recommend the shape functions and stiffness matrix for Isoparametric

elements.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Reddy J.N., “An Introduction to the Finite Element Method”, fourth Edition, McGraw-

Hill Mechanical Engineering, Reprint, 2018.

2. Seshu, P, "Text Book of Finite Element Analysis”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New

Delhi,2007.

REFERENCES :

1. Robert D. Cook, David S. Malkus, Michael E. Plesha, Robert J. Witt, "Concepts and

Applications of Finite Element Analysis”, Fourth Edition, Wiley StudentEdition,2010.

2. Tirupathi R. Chandrupatla, Ashok D. Belagundu, “Introduction to Finite Elements in

Engineering”, Third Edition, Reprint, Prentice Hall, 2012.

3. Zienkiewicz O.C and Taylor R. L, “The Finite Element Method: Volume 1 The Basics”,

Fifth Edition, Butterworth-Heinemann, Oxford. Reprint 2011.

WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-092-finite-element-analysis-of-

solids-and-fluids-i-fall-2009/lecture-notes/


https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-092-finite-element-analysis-of-solids-and-fluids-i-fall-2009/lecture-notes/

https://ocw.mit.edu/courses/mechanical-engineering/2-092-finite-element-analysis-of-solids-and-fluids-i-fall-2009/lecture-notes/


107

ME 18702 COMPUTER INTEGRATED MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To enable the students to apply the concepts of CIM and computerized tools and

techniques in various aspects of Manufacturing Viz., Computer assisted planning,

Manufacturing, layout, design, Automation, Production planning and control systems,

Robotics, Material handling systems and database management

UNIT I CIM CONCEPTS, AUTOMATION AND COMPUTER AIDED

PROCESS PLANNING

9

CIM concepts – Meaning and origin of CIM - Production systems – Automation in production

systems – Automation principles and strategies - Basic elements of an automated systems –

Advanced automation functions - Levels of automation - Process planning – Computer Aided

Process Planning (CAPP) – Logical steps in Variant and Generative approaches of CAPP.

Integration of CAD/CAPP/CAM/CNC.

UNIT II CELLULAR MANUFACTURING 9

Group Technology(GT), Part Families – Parts Classification and coding – Simple Problems in

Opitz Part Coding system – Production Flow Analysis – Cellular Manufacturing – Composite

part concept – Machine cell design and layout – Quantitative analysis in Cellular

Manufacturing – Rank Order Clustering Method - Arranging Machines in a GT cell – Hollier

Method – Simple Problems.

UNIT III FLEXIBLE MANUFACTURING SYSTEM (FMS) AND

AUTOMATED GUIDED VEHICLE SYSTEM (AGVS)

9

Types of Flexibility - FMS – FMC/FMS Components – FMS Application, Quantitative

analysis in FMS – Simple Problems. Automated Guided Vehicle System (AGVS) – AGVS

Application – Vehicle Guidance technology – Vehicle Management & Safety.

UNIT IV INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS 9

Robot Anatomy and Related Attributes – Classification of Robots- Robot Control systems –

End Effectors – Sensors in Robotics – Robot Accuracy and Repeatability - Industrial Robot

Applications – Intelligent robots.

UNIT V OPEN SYSTEM AND DATABASE FOR CIM 9

Open systems-open system inter connection - manufacturing automations protocol and

technical office protocol (MAP /TOP). Development of databases -database terminology-

architecture of database systems-data modelling and data associations -relational data bases -

database operators - advantages of data base and relational database.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Student will able to apply the concepts of CIM, Automation and CAPP for

sustained productivity while addressing challenges in manufacturing.

2. Student will able to derive the GT code from the given drawing using Opitz part

coding system and quantitatively analysis the problems in cellular manufacturing

using Hollier method.

3. Student will be able to apply the concept of FMS and its applications and be able to

solve simple quantitative analysis problems in FMS. Also understand AGVS, its

applications and vehicle guidance management and safety.

108

4. Student will able to select an appropriate type of robot configuration for the given task.

5. Students will be able to apply the standards in database management and in

interconnection of CIM system elements for compatible communication.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mikell. P. Groover “Automation, Production Systems and Computer Integrated

Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall of India, 4th edition, 2016.

2. R Radhakrishnan P, Subramanyan S and Raju V., “CAD/CAM/CIM”, 4th edition, New

Age International (P) Ltd, New Delhi, 2018.

REFERENCES :

1. Xun Xu, “Integrating Advanced Computer-Aided Design, Manufacturing, and

Numerical Control”. Information Science Reference, 2009.

2. Kant Vajpayee S, “Principles of Computer Integrated Manufacturing”, Prentice Hall

India, 2009.

3. David D.Bedworth, Mark R.Hendersan, Phillip M.Wolfe “Computer Integrated Design

and Manufacturing”, McGraw-Hill Inc, 2004.

4. Roger Hannam “Computer Integrated Manufacturing: From concepts to realisation”,

Addison –Wesley, 2007.

WEB RESOURCES :


109

ME 18703 MECHATRONICS L T P C

3 1 0 4

OBJECTIVES:

To impart the knowledge about elements and techniques involved in Mechatronics systems

which are very much essential to understand the emerging field of automation

To study the role of microcontrollers in automation industry

To describe the mechatronics design solutions for various industrial applications

To study the role of PLC and SCADA used in automation.

UNIT I SENSORS, TRANSDUCERS AND ACTUATORS 10

Static and dynamic Characteristics of Sensor, Potentiometers – LVDT – Capacitance sensors –

Strain gauges – Load cell – Eddy current sensor – Hall effect sensor – Temperature sensors –

Light sensors - Types of Stepper and Servo motors – Construction – Working Principle –

Advantages and Disadvantages.

UNIT II MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER 14

Introduction – Architecture of 8085 – Pin Configuration – Addressing Modes – Instruction set,

Timing diagram of 8085 - Programming – Concepts of 8051 microcontroller – Block diagram.

Concepts of 8255 PPI – Block diagram.

UNIT III PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLERS 14

Introduction – Basic structure – Input and output processing – Programming – Mnemonics –

Boolean algebra - Timers, counters and internal relays – Data handling – Selection of PLC

Applications of PLC

UNIT IV MECHATRONICS SYSTEM DESIGN 12

Mechatronics, key elements of mechatronic systems, Stages in design, traditional and

mechatronic design approaches, Data acquisition systems, overview of I/O process, virtual

instrumentation software. Condition monitoring, adaptive control and SCADA systems. Possible

Design Solutions

UNIT V MECHATRONICS APPLICATIONS 10

Mechatronic control in automated manufacturing, Artificial intelligence in Mechatronics, Fuzzy

logic applications in Mechatronics, Microsensors in Mechatronics - Case studies - pick and place

robot, engine management system, consumer mechatronic products.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students understand the basic concepts of Mechatronics system and its constituent

systems such as measurement system, control systems and various sensors and

transducers involved in mechatronics system design.

2. Students will be able to program a microprocessor and microcontroller with which they

can implement in mechatronic system design

3. The students will understand the interfacing concepts of various modules involved in

mechatronics system design

4. Students will able to write the programs to automate a process using PLC

5. The students will be able to design a mechatronics system for a given application using

mechatronics approach.

110

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bolton, “Mechatronics”, Prentice Hall, 2019

2. Ramesh S Gaonkar, “Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with

the 8085”, 6th Edition, Prentice Hall, 2013.

REFERENCES :

1. Bradley D.A, Dawson D, Buru N.C and Loader A.J, “Mechatronics”, Chapman and Hall,

2013.

2. Devadas Shetty and Richard A. Kolk, “Mechatronics Systems Design”, PWS publishing

company, 2013.

3. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessors & Microcontrollers”, Prentice Hall of India, 2013.

larence W, de Silva, "Mechatronics" CRC Press, First Indian Re-print, 2014.

4. Michael B. Histand and Davis G. Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics and

Measurement systems”, McGraw Hill International 4th edition, 2017.

5. Smaili.A and Mrad.F , “Mechatronics Integrated Technologies for Intelligent Machines”,

Oxford University Press, 2012.

WEB RESOURCES:


111

ME 18711 COMPREHENSION L T P C

0 0 2 1

OBJECTIVES :

To recall the knowledge, acquired through various theory and laboratory courses studied

from the first semester to sixth semester.

METHOD OF EVALUATION

1. The students will be assessed 100% internally to test his / her understanding of

fundamental concepts of mechanical engineering discipline.

2. Seminar, MCQ type of tests, case study, etc. will be conducted at periodical interval by

covering all the professional core courses.

TOTAL : 15 PERIODS

OUTCOMES

1. The students will remember the concepts, learnt from the courses studied in the previous

semesters.

2. The students will comprehend the technical knowledge which will help them to enhance

their employability skill or entrepreneurial skill

112

ME 18512 FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS AND SIMULATION

LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2

OBJECTIVES :

At the end of this course the students would have developed a thorough knowledge of the

Computer Aided Finite Element Analysis packages with an ability to effectively use the

tool for solving practical problems arising in engineering applications.

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

I ANALYSIS: 36 Periods

1. Force and Stress analysis using link elements in Trusses, cables etc.

2. Stress and deflection analysis in beams with different support conditions.

3. Stress analysis of flat plates and simple shells.

4. Stress analysis of axi–symmetric components.

5. Thermal stress and heat transfer analysis of plates.

6. Thermal stress analysis of cylindrical shells

7. Vibration analysis of spring-mass systems.

8. Modal analysis of Beam.

9. Harmonic, transient and spectrum analysis of simple systems.

B SIMULATION: 24 Periods

11. MATLAB basics, Dealing with matrices, Graphing-Functions of one variable and two

variables.

12. Use of Matlab to solve simple problems in vibration.

13. Mechanism Simulation using Multibody Dynamic software.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

1. Students will be able to demonstrate structural and thermal analysis for various mechanical

components using analysis software.

2. Students will be able to simulate mechanical systems using multibody simulation software.

3. Students will be able to predict vibration systems using MATLAB and analysis software

REFERENCES :

1. ANSYS Workbench Tutorial Release 13: Kent Lawrence, SDC Publications.

2. Simulation and Analysis Laboratory Manual prepared by Faculty of Mechanical

Engineering, Sri Venkateswara College of Engineering.

WEB RESOURCES:

https;//sites.ualberta.ca/ ᷉ wmoussa/AnsysTutorial/

113

ME 18713 MECHATRONICS LABORATORY L T P C

0 0 4 2

OBJECTIVES :

To synergies the combination of mechanical, electronics, hydraulics, pneumatics and

sensors used in automation industry.

To introduce the principles of machine vision system

LIST OF EXPERIMENTS

1. Realizing Basic circuits using Hydraulic and Pneumatic concepts.

2. Realizing Electro-Pneumatic circuits using electrical timers.

3. Realizing of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using Programmable Logic Controller

(PLC).

4. Simulation of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using Fluid-Sim Software.

5. Simulation of Hydraulic and Pneumatic circuits using Automation Studio Software.

6. Assembly language programming of 8085 Microprocessor.

7. Interfacing of Stepper motor and Traffic light control using 8051 Microcontroller.

8. Speed control of AC/DC and Servo motor.

9. Measurement of Displacement using Linear Variable Differential Transducers (LVDT).

10 Torque and Strain measurement using Wheatstone bridge Strain gauge.

11. Measurement of Angle using Rotary Potentiometer.

12. Measurement of temperature using temperature transducer (Thermistor / Thermocouple /

RTD)

13. Measurement of Voltage and current using Hall Effect transducer.

14. Image processing technique using Machine Vision system.

15. Programming on Pick and Place robot manipulator.

TOTAL : 60 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

1. The students will be able to work on basic fluid power based automated process.

2. The students are competent to program a pick and place robot for different

operations

3. The students will be able to identify the various accessories, tooling’s required

for automation.

4. The students are capable to design and program for given basic sequence of

operation using Programmable Logic Controller (PLC).

5. The students can control a process using microprocessor/ microcontroller.

114

REFERENCES :

1. Anthony Esposito,” Fluid Power with Applications”, PHI / Pearson Education, 2005

2. Bolton, “Mechatronics”, Printice Hall, 2014

3. Mechatronics Lab Manual prepared by Faculty of Mechanical Engineering Sri

Venkateswara College of Engineering.

115

SEMESTER VIII

ME 18811 PROJECT WORK L T P C

0 0 24 12

OBJECTIVES :

To develop the ability to solve a specific problem right from its identification and

literature Review till the successful solution of the same.

To train the students in preparing project reports and to face reviews and viva voce

examination.

The students in a group of 3 to 4works on a topic approved by the Head of the department under

the guidance of a faculty member and prepare a comprehensive project report after completing

the work to the satisfaction of the supervisor. The progress of the project is evaluated based on a

minimum of three reviews. The review committee may be constituted by the Head of the

Department. A project report is required at the end of the semester. The project work is evaluated

based on oral presentation and the project report jointly by an external and internal examiners

constituted by the Head of the Department.

TOTAL : 360 PERIODS

OUTCOMES

1. On Completion of the project work, students will be in a position to summarize any

challenging practical problems and find solution by adapting proper methodology.

116

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – I, IV, V ( To be chosen during ODD SEMESTER )

ME 18001 AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To impart an insight in construction and working principle of various parts of an

automobile

To describe the assembling and dismantling process of engine parts and transmission

system

To study about different alternate fuels for IC Engine for the betterment of society.

To study about different emission norms and its standards

UNIT I VEHICLE STRUCTURE AND ENGINES 9

Types of automobiles, vehicle construction and different layouts, chassis, frame and body,

Vehicle aerodynamics (various resistances and moments involved), IC Engine components –

functions, materials and its applications in land (Off road and On road), water and air vehicles,

variable valve timing (VVT) and its necessity

UNIT II ENGINE AUXILIARY SYSTEMS 9

Electronically controlled gasoline injection system for SI engines (SPI, MPFI, GDI),

electronically controlled diesel injection system (Unit injector system, Rotary distributor type

and common rail direct injection system CRDI), Electronic ignition system (Transistorized coil

ignition system, capacitive discharge ignition system), Supercharger and Turbo chargers (WGT,

VGT), Engine emission control by three way catalytic converter system, SCR system and EGR

system

UNIT III TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS 9

Clutch-types and construction, gear boxes-manual and automatic, gear shift mechanisms, Over

drive, transfer box, fluid flywheel, torque converter, propeller shaft, slip joints, universal joints

Differential and rear axle, Hotchkiss Drive and Torque Tube Drive

UNIT IV STEERING, BRAKES AND SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 9

Steering geometry and types of steering gear box - Power Steering, Types of Front Axle, Types

of Suspension Systems, Pneumatic and Hydraulic Braking Systems, Antilock Braking System

(ABS), electronic brake force distribution (EBD) and Traction Control

UNIT V ALTERNATIVE ENERGY SOURCES 9

Hybrid Vehicles - Fuel Cell – Electric Battery = Electric vehicle – feasibility study of Electric,

Hybrid and fuel cell vehicle, Alternate fuels - Emission norms (Euro and BS) and Driving cycle

Note: Practical Training in dismantling and assembling of Engine parts and Transmission

Systems should be given to the students

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Aware of basics of automobiles, construction and working of various auxiliary systems.

2. Identify various electronics components involved in automobile working system.

3. Evaluate the mechanical system performance along with electronics components.

4. Ability to design a suitable working system and energy sources for a vehicle.

117

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Jain K.K. and Asthana R.B, “Automobile Engineering” Tata McGraw Hill Publishers,

New Delhi, 2002.

2. Kirpal Singh, “Automobile Engineering”, Vol.1 & 2, Seventh Edition, Standard

Publishers, New Delhi, 2018.

REFERENCES :

1. Ganesan V. “Internal Combustion Engines”, Third Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2007.

2. Heinz Heisler, “Advanced Engine Technology,” SAE International Publications USA,

1998.

3. Joseph Heitner, “Automotive Mechanics,” Second Edition, East-West Press, 1999.

4. Martin W, Stockel and Martin T Stockle , “Automotive Mechanics Fundamentals,” The

Good heart–Will Cox Company Inc, USA ,1978.

5. Newton, Steeds and Garet, “Motor Vehicles”, Butterworth Publishers,1989.

WEBREOURCES:


118

ME 18003 BIO MATERIALS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the basics of biomaterials and their properties

To obtain the knowledge of various types of materials used as implants

To design and develop materials for medical and electronic applications

To test the compatibility of materials with their host

UNIT I BASICS OF BIO MATERIALS 7

Introduction: Definition of biomaterials, requirements & classification of biomaterials,

Comparison of properties of some common biomaterials. Effects of physiological fluid on the

properties of biomaterials. Biological responses (extra and intra-vascular system). Surface

properties of materials, physical properties of materials, mechanical properties

UNIT II METALLIC IMPLANT MATERIALS 9

Stainless steel, Co-based alloys, Ti and Ti-based alloys. Importance of stress-corrosion cracking.

Host tissue reaction with bio metal, corrosion behavior and the importance of passive films for

tissue adhesion. Hard tissue replacement implant: Orthopedic implants, Dental implants. Soft

tissue replacement implants: Percutaneous and skin implants, Vascular implants, Heart valve

implants-Tailor made composite in medium

UNIT III POLYMERIC IMPLANT MATERIALS 11

Polyolefin’s, polyamides, acrylic polymers, fluorocarbon polymers, silicon rubbers, acetyls.

Viscoelastic behavior: creep-recovery, stress-relaxation, strain rate sensitivity. Importance of

molecular structure, hydrophilic and hydrophobic surface properties, migration of additives

(processing aids), aging and environmental stress cracking. Physiochemical characteristics of

biopolymers. Biodegradable polymers for medical purposes, Biopolymers in controlled release

systems. Synthetic polymeric membranes and their biological applications. Polymers filled with

estrogenic fillers.

UNIT IV CERAMIC IMPLANT MATERIALS 9

Definition of bio ceramics. Common types of bio ceramics: Aluminum oxides, Glass ceramics,

Carbons. Bio restorable and bioactive ceramics. Importance of wear resistance and low fracture

toughness. Host tissue reactions: importance of interfacial tissue reaction. Composite implant

materials: Mechanics of improvement of properties by incorporating different elements.

Composite theory of fiber reinforcement (short and long fibers, fibers pull out). Host tissue

reactions.

UNIT V DESIGN & COMPATIBILITY 9

Design of materials for biomedical application: Cardiovascular, dental implants, orthopedic

application, skin, ophthalmologic applications, wound healing, sutures, biomedical and

biosensors. Biocompatibility & Toxicological screening of biomaterials: Definition of

biocompatibility, blood compatibility and tissue compatibility.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will acquire the knowledge of bio materials and various properties.

2. The students will be able to explain about metallic implant materials and their behavior

119

3. The students will be able to explain about polymeric implant materials and their behavior

4. The students will be able to explain about ceramic implant materials and their behavior

5. The students will be able to recommend a design for bio material application and verify its

compatibility

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Buddy D. Ratner, Allan S. Hoffman, Frederick J. Schoen and Jack E. Lemons,

“Biomaterials Science: An Introduction to Materials in Medicine”, Academic Press,

2004.

2. J.B. Park and J.D. Bronzino, “Biomaterials: Principles and Applications”, CRC Press.

2002.

REFERENCES :

1. T. M. Wright, and S. B. Goodman, “Implant Wear in Total Joint Replacement: Clinical

and Biologic Issues, Material and Design Considerations”, American Academy of

Orthopedic Surgeons, 2001.

2. L Ambrosio, “Biomedical composites”, Woodhead Publishing Limited, 2009.

3. K.C. Dee, D.A. Puleo and R. Bizios, “An Introduction to Tissue-Biomaterial

Interactions”, Wiley publications, 2002.

4. T.S. Hin, “Engineering Materials for Biomedical Applications”, World Scientific, 2004.

5. B. Rolando, “Integrated Biomaterials Science”, Springer, 2002

WEB RESOURCE :



120

ME18005 COMPOSITE MATERIALS AND MECHANICS L T P C

(COMMON TO ME & AE) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

This course aims to provide the fundamental knowledge on different types of fibers and

matrix and their properties

The course will impart knowledge on different processing methodology adopted for

polymer matrix composites.

The course focuses on fundamental constitutive equations for different types of

composite lamina.

To predict the strength of laminates using various failure criteria.

To familiarize the metal, ceramic, and carbon composite materials and their processing

methods.

UNIT I FIBERS AND MATRIX MATERIALS 9

Fibers – Fabrication, Structure, properties and applications – Glass fiber, Boron fiber, carbon

fiber, organic fiber, ceramic and metallic fibers - whiskers– Fabrication of Matrix materials –

polymers, metals and ceramics and their properties – interfaces – Wettability – Types of bonding

at the interface – Tests for measuring interfacial strength - Physical and chemical properties.

UNIT II PROCESSING OF POLYMER MATRIX COMPOSITES 8

Classification of Polymers – Properties of Thermo and Thermosetting Plastics – Extrusion,

Polymer matrix composites: hand layup, spray, filament winding, Pultrusion, resin transfer

moulding, autoclave moulding - bag moulding, compression moulding with Bulk Moulding

Compound and sheet Moulding Compound – thermoplastic matrix composites – film stacking,

diaphragm forming, thermoplastic tape laying, injection moulding – interfaces in PMCs -

structure, properties and application of PMCs –recycling of PMCs.- Introduction to Biopolymer

Composites – Natural fiber and Matrices – Properties and Applications

UNIT III LAMINA CONSTITUTIVE EQUATIONS 10

Lamina Assumptions – Macroscopic Viewpoint. Generalized Hooke’s Law. Reduction to

Homogeneous Orthotropic Lamina – Isotropic limit case, Orthotropic Stiffness matrix (Qij),

Typical Commercial material properties, Rule of Mixtures. Generally Orthotropic Lamina –

Transformation Matrix, Transformed Stiffness. Laminate Constitutive Equations – Coupling

Interactions, Balanced Laminates, Symmetric Laminates, Angle Ply Laminates, Cross Ply

Laminates.

UNIT IV LAMINA STRENGTH ANALYSIS 10

121

Introduction - Maximum Stress and Strain Criteria. Von-Misses Yield criterion for Isotropic

Materials. Generalized Hill’s Criterion for Anisotropic materials. Tsai-Hill’s Failure Criterion for

Composites. Tensor Polynomial (Tsai-Wu) Failure criterion. Prediction of laminate Failure

Equilibrium Equations of Motion. Energy Formulations. Static Bending Analysis. Buckling

Analysis. Free Vibrations – Natural Frequencies and mode shapes

UNIT V PROCESSING OF METAL, CERAMIC AND CARBON MATRIX

COMPOSITES

8

Metallic matrices: Aluminium, titanium, magnesium, copper alloys – processing of MMCs:

liquid state, Solid state, in situ fabrication techniques – diffusion bonding – powder metallurgy

techniques interfaces in MMCs – mechanical properties – machining of MMCs – Applications.

Introduction to Nano composites

Processing of CMCs: cold pressing, sintering, reaction bonding, liquid infiltration, lanxide

process – in situ- chemical reaction techniques: chemical vapour deposition, chemical vapour

impregnation, Solgel – interfaces in CMCs – mechanical properties and applications of CMCs –

Carbon carbon Composites – applications.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will be able to recognize and differentiate the fiber and matrix materials.

2. Students get familiarized with processing method for fabrication of different kinds of

composites

3. Students will deduce the Lamina Constitutive Equations to micro model the composite

materials.

4. Students will identify and analyze the performance of composite materials by applying

various failure criteria.

5. Students will be competent to apply the appropriate fiber and matrix for real time

applications.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gibson R.F. “Principles of Composite Material Mechanics”, Second edition, McGraw

Hill, 1994.

2. Hyer M.W, “Stress Analysis of Fiber- Reinforced Composite Materials”, McGraw Hill,

1998.

REFERENCES :

1. Isaac M. Daniel, Ori Isha, “Engineering Mechanics of Composite Materials”, Oxford

122

University Press, 2005

2. Krishnan K Chawla, “Composite Materials: Science and Engineering”, International

Edition, Springer, 2012

3. Mallick P.K., “Fiber Reinforced Composites: Materials, Manufacturing and Design”,

CRC press, New Delhi, 2010

4. Mallick, P.K. and Newman.S., “Composite Materials Technology”, Hanser Publishers,

2003.

5. Said Jahanmir, Ramulu M. and Philp Koshy, “Machining of Ceramics and Composites”,

Marcel Dekker Inc., New York, 1999

6. Bhagwan D. Agarwal, Lawrence J. Broutman, K. Chandrashekhara , Analysis and

Performance of Fiber Composites, 3rd Edition, John Wiley & Sons,2006.

7. Robert M. Jones, Mechanics Of Composite Materials (Materials Science & Engineering

Series), Taylor & Francis, 2015.

WEBREOURCES:







123

ME18007 DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING AND ASSEMBLY L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To impart knowledge on the design principles, properties of materials, fits and tolerances

and datum features.

To expose the concepts and the factors influence on form design

To inculcate the design features to facilitate design for machinability, economy,

accessibility and assembly.

To infuse the knowledge on design for Manual Assembly and Automatic assembly of a

product.

To inject the knowledge on design of Environment with consideration of environment

regulations


General design principles for manufacturability - strength and mechanical factors, mechanisms

selection, evaluation method, Process capability - Feature tolerances Geometric tolerances -

Assembly limits -Datum features - Tolerance stacks.

UNIT II FACTORS INFLUENCING FORM DESIGN 13

Working principle, Material, Manufacture, Design- Possible solutions - Materials choice –

Influence of materials on form design - form design of welded members, forgings and

castings.

UNIT III COMPONENT DESIGN -MACHINING CONSIDERATION 8

Design features to facilitate machining - drills - milling cutters - keyways - Doweling

procedures, counter sunk screws - Reduction of machined area- simplification by separation -

simplification by amalgamation - Design for machinability - Design for economy - Design for

clampability – Design for accessibility.

UNIT IV DESIGN FOR ASSEMBLY 10

Design for assembly – Product design for manual assembly - Product design for automatic

assembly – Robotic assembly

UNIT V DESIGN FOR THE ENVIRONMENT 9

Introduction – Environmental objectives – Global issues – Regional and local issues – Basic

DFE methods – Design guide lines – Example application – Lifecycle assessment – Basic

method –AT&T’s environmentally responsible product assessment - Weighted sum

assessment method – Lifecycle assessment method – Techniques to reduce environmental

impact – Design to minimize material usage – Design for disassembly – Design for

recyclability – Design for manufacture – Design for energy efficiency – Design to regulations

and standards.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The Students will understand the concept of design principles, fits and tolerances.

2. The students will apply the influencing factors in the form design.

3. The students will execute the design considerations in machinability, economy,

accessibility and assembly.

4. The students will apply the design principles for manual assembly and automatic

assembly of a product.

124

5. The students will implement the environment regulations in design for environment.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Boothroyd, G, “Design for Assembly Automation and Product Design”, CRC Press,

2010.

2. Boothroyd, G, Heartz and Nike, “Product Design for Manufacture”, CRC Press, 2010.

3. Fixel, J, “Design for the Environment”, McGraw Hill., 2011.

REFERENCES :

1. A K Chitale and R C Gupta, “Product Design and Manufacturing”, PHI, New

Delhi,2003.

2. Bralla, “Design for Manufacture handbook”, McGraw hill, 1999.

3. Dickson, John. R, and Corroda Poly, “Engineering Design and Design for Manufacture

andStructural Approach”, Field Stone Publisher, USA, 2001

4. Graedel T. Allen By. B, “Design for the Environment Angle Wood Cliff”, Prentice

Hall. Reason Pub., 1996

5. Kevin Otto and Kristin Wood, “Product Design”, Pearson, Second Edition, 2013.

WEBREOURCES:



125

ME18009 DESIGN OF HEAT EXCHANGERS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To provide fundamental knowledge of different type of heat exchangers

To provide knowledge of design of heat exchangers

To impart knowledge in sizing and rating of the heat exchangers for various applications

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF HEAT EXCHANGER 5

Temperature distribution and its implications types – shell and tube heat exchangers –

regenerators and recuperators – analysis of heat exchangers – LMTD and effectiveness

method.

UNIT II DESIGN ASPECTS 13

Heat transfer and pressure loss – flow configuration – effect of baffles – effect of deviations

from ideality – design of double pipe - finned tube - shell and tube heat exchangers -

simulation of heat exchangers.

UNIT III HEAT PIPE HEAT EXCHANGERS 8

Heat pipes - types and applications, operating principles, working fluids, wick structures,

control techniques. Heat pipe design – fluid selection, wick selection, material selection,

preliminary design considerations.

UNIT IV COMPACT AND PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS 10

Types – merits and demerits – design of compact heat exchangers, plate heat exchangers –

performance influencing parameters - limitations.

UNIT V CONDENSERS AND COOLING TOWERS 9

Design of surface and evaporative condensers – cooling tower – performance characteristics.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will be familiar with various classifications of heat exchangers used in

industries

2. The students will be able to design the conventional heat transfer equipment like heat

exchangers.

3. The students will analyze the characteristics of heat pipes and be able to design the

heat pipes

4. The students will evaluate the characteristics of compact and plate heat exchangers and

be able to design them.

5. The students will explore the features of condensers and cooling tower and be able to

design them.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Kern, D. Q., Process Heat Transfer, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1st Edition, 2011.

2. Sadik Kakac and Hongtan Liu, Heat Exchangers Selection, Rating and Thermal

126

Design, CRC Press, 2002.

REFERENCES :

1. Sekulic D.P., Fundamentals of Heat Exchanger Design, John Wiley, 2003.

2. Walker, Industrial Heat Exchangers - A Basic Guide, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1980

3. Hewitt G.F., Shires G.L. and Bott T.R., Process Heat Transfer, CRC Press, 1994.

4. Nicholas Cheremisioff, Cooling Tower, Ann Arbor Science Pub 1981.

5. Dunn, P. D. and Reay, D. A., Heat Pipes, Fourth Edition, Pergamon Press, Third

Edition 2013.

WEBREOURCES:

http://www.nitc.ac.in/


127

ME 18011 ENERGY CONSERVATION AND WASTE HEAT

RECOVERY L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To acquire knowledge about various aspects of energy conservation

To learn about energy efficient buildings

To learn about energy efficiency in various engineering equipment

To learn about energy storage and waste heat recovery methods

UNIT I ASPECTS OF ENERGY CONSERVATION 6

Introduction to ENCON, Approach and modern techniques, benefits, trends. Energy

Conservation Technology (Thermal Energy).Energy Conservation in Energy Intensive

Industries. Techno-Economic evaluation of conservation technologies, Efficiency Improvements

Thermal Utilities: Boilers, Steam System, Thermic Fluid Heating Systems, Furnaces, Heating

and Melting Applications, Refractories etc,

UNIT II ENERGY EFFICIENT BUILDINGS 9

Introduction, Definition and concepts, Energy and Water as a resource, Criticality of resources

and needs of modern living. Envelop heat loss and heat gain and its evaluation, Thermal

Comport improvement methods, Optimum performance, Other building comports, IAQ

requirements, Electrical Energy Conservation, Opportunities and Techniques for energy

conservation in Buildings. Adoption to sustainable resources, process and Technologies. Green

Buildings, Intelligent Buildings, Rating of Buildings, Efficient Use of Buildings, Solar Passive

Architecture. Eco-housing concepts and National and International norms.

UNIT III ENERGY EFFICIENCY IN THERMAL EQUIPMENT 12

Boilers: Types, combustion in boilers, performances evaluation, analysis of losses, feed water

treatment, blow down, energy conservation opportunities. Boiler efficiency calculation,

evaporation ratio and efficiency for coal, oil and gas. Soot blowing and soot deposit reduction,

reasons for boiler tube failures, start up, shut down and preservation, Thermic fluid heaters, super

critical boilers; Steam System: Properties of steam, assessment of steam distribution losses,

steam leakages, steam trapping, condensate and flash steam recovery system, identifying

opportunities for energy savings. Steam utilization, Performance assessment more details,

installation, thermo-compressor, steam pipe insulation, condensate pumping, steam dryers;

Furnaces: Classification, general fuel economy measures in furnaces, excess air, heat

distribution, temperature control, draft control, waste heat recovery. Forging furnace heat

balance, Cupola, non-ferrous melting, Induction furnace, performance evaluation of a furnace,

hot air generators; Insulation and Refractories: Insulation-types and application, economic

thickness of insulation, heat savings and application criteria, Refractory-types, selection and

application of refractories, heat loss. Cold insulation; Heat Exchangers: Types, networking,

pinch analysis, multiple effect evaporators, condensers, distillation column, etc.

UNIT IV ENERGY STORAGE 9

Need and importance of Energy storage in Conventional and Nonconventional Energy Systems.

Technical Aspects (Measurements, Quantify) Various forms of Energy Storage: Thermal,

Chemical, Mechanical, Electrical and Nuclear Techno Commercial Analysis (Economical

aspects), Energy Storage: Devices and Systems.

UNIT V WASTE HEAT RECOVERY 9

Classification, advantages and applications, commercially viable waste heat recovery devices,

saving potential. Sources of waste heat and its potential applications, Waste heat survey and

128

measurements, Data collection, Limitations and affecting. Cogeneration: Definition, need,

application, advantages, classification, saving potentials. Heat balance, steam turbine efficiency,

tri-generation, micro turbine.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will be exposed to aspects of energy conservation.

2. The students will be capable to recommend a design for energy efficient buildings.

3. Students will identify opportunities for energy conservation in various industrial thermal

equipment.

4. Students will be exposed to various energy storage devices.

5. Students will be able to conduct waste heat survey and propose a suitable recovery

system based on the utility.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Eastop T.D and Croft D.R, “Energy Efficiency for Engineers and Technologists”,

Logman Scientific and Technical, 1990.

2. Reay D.A, “Industrial Energy Conservation”, Pergamon Press, 1979.

REFERENCES:

1. Openshaw Taylor E, "Utilisation of Electric Energy", Orient Longman Ltd, 2003.

2. Donald R Wulfinghoff, “Energy Efficiency Manual”, Energy Institute Press, 1999.

3. Energy Audit Manual- The Practitioner’s Guide, EMC-Kerala and NPC 2017.

4. Bureau of Energy Efficiency -Energy Management Series, 2006.

WEB RESOURCES:


129

ME18013 ENTERPRISE RESOURCE PLANNING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To provide Knowledge on various Modules of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP)

and Related Technologies.

To learn the ERP Modules structure, Purchasing and Sales perspective.

To understand the future direction of Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP).

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ERP 9

Evolution of ERP, Various Modules of ERP- Advantage of ERP- Integrated Management

Information- Business Modeling- ERP for Small Business- ERP for Make to Order

Companies- Business Process Mapping for ERP Module- Design, Environment and its

Selection for ERP Implementation.

UNIT II ERP AND RELATED TECHNOLOGIES 9

Business Process Re-engineering, Management Information systems, Decision Support Systems-

Executive Information Systems- Advantages of EIS- Disadvantages of EIS- Data Warehousing- Data

Mining- On-Line Analytical Processing- Product Life Cycle Management- Supply Chain Management-

ERP Security.

UNIT III ERP MODULES STRUCTURE 9

Finance, Sales and Distribution, Manufacturing and Production Planning- Material and

Capacity Planning- Shop Floor Control- Quality Management- JIT/Repetitive Manufacturing-

Cost Management- Engineering Data Management- Engineering Change Control-

Configuration Management- Serialisation / Lot Control- Tooling- Human Resource.

UNIT IV PURCHASING AND SALES PERSPECTIVE 9

Role of ERP in Purchasing- Purchase Module- Features of purchase module- Benefits of

purchase module- ERP Purchase System- Role of ERP in Sales and Distribution- Sub-

Modules of the Sales and Distribution Module- Billing and sales support- Foreign trade-

Integration of Sales and Distribution Module.

UNIT V FUTURE DIRECTIONS IN ERP 9

New Trends in ERP- ERP to ERP II-Implementation of Organisation-Wide ERP, Development of New

Markets and Channels- Latest ERP Implementation Methodologies- case studies- ERP and E-business.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The Students will understand ERP concept, Business modeling, Business process and

Mapping.

2. Will apply ERP related technologies to various management systems.

3. The Students will correlate various ERP modules for Finance, sales and distribution

4. The Students will formulate the role of ERP in purchasing, Billing and foreign trading.

5. Develop the Future directions of ERP implementation in new market, channels and E-

business.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bret Wagne and Ellen F. Monk, “Enterprise Resource Planning”, Cengage Learning-2008.

130

REFERENCES :

1. Sheikh Khalid, “Manufacturing Resource Planning (MRP II)

with Introduction to ERP, SCMand CRM”, Tata McGraw—Hill, New Delhi, 2001

2. Ellen F. Monk, Bret Wagner, “Concepts in Enterprise Resource Planning”, Cengage

Learning-2017.

3. Christian N. Madu, “ERP and Supply Chain Management”, CHI,2005

4. Glynn C. Williams, ‘Implementing SAP ERP Sales &Distribution”, McGraw-Hill-

2017

WEB REOURCES:

http://www.retawprojects.com/uploads/An-Overview-Enterprise-Resource-

Planning__ERP.pdf

http://www.retawprojects.com/uploads/An-Overview-Enterprise-Resource-Planning__ERP.pdf

http://www.retawprojects.com/uploads/An-Overview-Enterprise-Resource-Planning__ERP.pdf

131

CS 18851 FUNDAMENTALS OF ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE L T P C

(COMMON TO EE & CS) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the various characteristics of Intelligent agents

To learn about the different search strategies in AI

To learn to represent knowledge in solving AI problems

To know about the various applications of AI.

To introduce the concepts of Expert Systems.


Introduction–Definition - Future of Artificial Intelligence – Characteristics of Intelligent Agents – Typical

Intelligent Agents – Problem Solving Approach to Typical AI problems - Production system characteristics

-Specialized production systems.

UNIT II PROBLEM SOLVING METHODS 9

Problem solving Methods - Search Strategies- Uninformed - Informed - Heuristics - Local Search

Algorithms and Optimization Problems - Searching with Partial Observations – Constraint Satisfaction

Problems – Constraint Propagation - Backtracking Search - Game Playing – Optimal Decisions in Games

– Stochastic Games.

UNIT III KNOWLEDGE REPRESENTATION 9

First Order Predicate Logic – Prolog Programming – Unification – Forward Chaining-Backward

Chaining – Resolution – Structured representation of knowledge.

UNIT IV APPLICATIONS 9

AI applications – Language Models – Information Retrieval- Information Extraction – Natural Language

Processing - Machine Translation – Speech Recognition – Robot – Hardware – Perception – Planning –

Moving.

UNIT V EXPERT SYSTEMS 9

Expert systems - Architecture of expert systems, Roles of expert systems - Knowledge Acquisition – Meta

knowledge, Heuristics. Typical expert systems - MYCIN, DART, XCON, Expert systems shells.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Learn Production systems

2. Use appropriate search algorithms for any AI problem

3. Represent a problem using first order logic

4. Design various applications that uses Artificial Intelligence

5. Develop an Expert System

TEXT BOOKS:

1. S. Russell and P. Norvig, “Artificial Intelligence: A Modern Approach” , Prentice Hall, Third

Edition, 2009.

2. Kevin Night and Elaine Rich, Nair B., “Artificial Intelligence (SIE)”, Mc Graw Hill- 2008.

REFERENCES:

1. M. Tim Jones, ―Artificial Intelligence: A Systems Approach (Computer Science), Jones and

Bartlett Publishers, Inc.; First Edition, 2008

132

2. Nils J. Nilsson, ―The Quest for Artificial Intelligence‖, Cambridge University Press,2009.

3. Peter Jackson, “Introduction to Expert Systems”, 3rd Edition, Pearson Education, 2007.

4. Deepak Khemani “Artificial Intelligence”, Tata Mc Graw Hill Education 2013.

133

ME 18015 LEAN SIX SIGMA L T P C

2 0 0 1

OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge on the Lean manufacturing concepts.

To expertise in the implementation of lean metrics, VSM and all lean assessments.

To gain knowledge on the six sigma principles, tools and its techniques.

To inculcate the knowledge on the application of Six Sigma principles of three phases to

improve the quality of process outputs.

To induce a knowledge on the analyze and control the processes using six sigma concept.

UNIT I LEAN MANUFACTURING 9

Evolution of lean; traditional versus lean manufacturing; ford production system concept of lean;

Toyota’s foray in lean, Customer Need; lean tools- Process mapping value stream management-

3 M; 7 types of Muda; 7 major losses reduction. cell layout; line balancing; concept of kaizen;

steps involved in kaizen deployment; kanban concepts; types of Kanban; and practical

application; push vs pull; changeover time reduction - single minute exchange of die; concept of

TPM; poka-yoke; 5S; maintenance - preventive, time based and condition based; autonomous

maintenance, JIT, Autonomation, DFMA

UNIT II LEAN METRICS 9

Identify lean metrics; kaizen cloud identification in VSM; lean assessment. improving targets and

benchmarks.

UNIT III SIX SIGMA , TOOLS AND TECHNIQUES 9

SIPCO,QFD; voice of the customer, kano models, , cost of poor quality (COPQ), statistical

process control, DMAIC

UNIT IV SIX SIGMA DEFINE, MEASURE AND ANALYSE PHASE 9

DMAIC phases, overview, project charter – voice of the customer – high level process map –

project team – case study, types of measures – introduction to statistical methods – sampling plan

– data collection – choosing statistical software – measure tools – process maps, pareto charts,

cause and effect diagrams, histograms, six sigma measurements – measurement system analysis

– process capability calculations. Analyze – process analysis – hypothesis testing – statistical

tests and tables – tools for analyzing relationships among variables – survival analysis.

UNIT V IMPROVE AND CONTROL PHASE 9

Process redesign – generating improvement alternatives – design of experiments – pilot

experiments – cost/benefit analysis – implementation plan. Control phase control plan – process

scorecard – failure mode and effects analysis – final project report and documentation. DMADV,

DFSS–six sigma in manufacturing and services case studies & Sustainability of Lean Six Sigma.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will understand the Lean Manufacturing concepts and related tools.

2. The students will implement the lean metrics, value stream mapping and all lean

assessments.

3. The Students will be competent to apply the six sigma principles, tools and its techniques.

134

4. The Students will experiment the implementation of define, measure and analyze phases

of six sigma methods.

5. The Students will determine the improve and control phases of six sigma

REFERENCES :

1. Gopalakrishnan N, Simplified Lean Manufacture: Elements, rules, tools and

implementation, Prentice Hall of India, NewDelhi 2013.

2. James P. Womack , Daniel T. Jones ,Lean Thinking, Free press business,2013.

3. Kai Yang and Basemel-Haik, “Design for Six-Sigma: A Roadmap for Product

Development”, McGraw Hill, 2009.

4. Michael L. George, David Rowlands, Bill Kastle ,What is Lean Six Sigma, Tata

McGrawHill,2003.

5. James P. Womack , Daniel T. Jones ,Lean Thinking, Free press business,2013.

WEB RESOURCES:


135

ME18017 MECHANICAL VIBRATIONS AND NOISE CONTROL L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To make the students to learn about the sources of vibration and noise in mechanical

systems

To prepare the students to do design modifications so as to reduce the vibration and

noise and improve the life of the components.

UNIT I SINGLE DEGREE FREEDOM SYSTEM 9

Introduction - Types of Vibration - Sources of vibration-Mathematical Models - Calculation of

Natural Frequencies - Single degree freedom systems with and without damping- Torsional

Vibration systems.

UNIT II MULTI DEGREE FREEDOM SYSTEM 9

Calculation of Natural Frequencies – Two degree freedom system - Three degree freedom

system- Dunkerley Method -Holzer Method – Vibration of Continuous System

UNIT III BASICS OF NOISE 9

Introduction, amplitude, frequency, wavelength and sound pressure level, addition, subtraction

and averaging decibel levels, noise dose level, legislation, measurement and analysis of noise,

measurement environment, equipment, frequency analysis, tracking analysis, sound quality

analysis.

UNIT IV SOURCE OF NOISE AND CONTROL 9

Methods for control of engine noise, combustion noise, mechanical noise, predictive analysis,

palliative treatments and enclosures, automotive noise control principles, sound in enclosures,

sound energy absorption, sound transmission through barriers.

UNIT V VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS AND CONTROL 9

Vibration Measuring Devices: Transducers, vibration pickups –Frequency measuring

instruments: single reed, multi reed and stroboscope- Vibration isolation, Tuned absorbers, un-

tuned viscous dampers and damping treatments.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will develop the mathematical model and predict the natural frequency of

single degree freedom systems.

2. The students will be able to determine the natural frequency of multi degree freedom

systems.

3. The students will be skillful to explain the Noise and its related terms.

4. The students will compete to analyze different sources of Noise and apply the learned

knowledge to control it.

5. The students will select suitable methods for measuring and controlling the vibration of

mechanical systems

136

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Julian Happian and Smith, “An Introduction to Modern Vehicle Design”, Butterworth -

Heinemann, 2012.

2. Rao, S.S., “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson Education, Sixth edition, 2018.

REFERENCES:

1. David A Bies and Colin H Hansen, “Engineering Noise Control – Theory and

Practice”,Taylor & Francis, Fourth Edition, 2009.

2. Dukkipati R.V, “Advanced Mechanical Vibrations”, Prentice Hall India Learning

Private Limited, 2012

3. Groover, G.K, “Mechanical Vibrations”, New Chand and Bros, Roorkee, 2014.

4. Kelly S. G, “Mechanical Vibrations”, McGrawHill (India) Limited, 2015.

5. Ramamurti. V, “Mechanical Vibration Practice with Basic Theory”, Narosa, New

Delhi,2012.

WEBSITE RESOURCES:





137

ME 18019 NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING AND EVALUATION

L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To study and understand the various on non-destructive testing methods and evaluation of defects

on the surface

To learn techniques involving thermal energy and sound energy

To learn about techniques involving high energy radiation

To understand the industrial applications of non destructive testing (NDT)

UNIT I OVERVIEW OF NDT 9

NDT Versus Mechanical testing, Overview of the Non Destructive Testing Methods for the

detection of manufacturing defects as well as material characterization. Relative merits and

limitations, Visual inspection – Unaided and aided.

UNIT II SURFACE TESTING METHODS 9

Liquid Penetrant Testing - Principles, types and properties of liquid penetrants, developers,

advantages and limitations of various methods, Testing Procedure, Interpretation of results.

Magnetic Particle Testing- Theory of magnetism, inspection materials, Magnetization methods,

Interpretation and evaluation of test indications, Principles and methods of demagnetization,

Residual magnetism.

UNIT III THERMOGRAPHY & EDDY CUURENT TESTING 9

Thermography- Principles, Contact and non contact inspection methods, Techniques for

applying liquid crystals, Advantages and limitation - infrared radiation and infrared detectors,

Instrumentations and methods, applications. Eddy Current Testing-Generation of eddy currents,

Properties of eddy currents, Eddy current sensing elements, Probes, Instrumentation,

Types of arrangement, Applications, advantages, Limitations, Interpretation/Evaluation.

UNIT IV ULTRASONIC & ACOUSTIC EMISSION TESTING 9

Ultrasonic Testing-Principle, Transducers, transmission and pulse-echo method, straight beam

and angle beam, instrumentation, data representation, A/Scan, B-scan, C-scan. Phased Array

Ultrasound, Time of Flight Diffraction. Acoustic Emission Technique –Principle, AE

parameters, Applications

UNIT V RADIOGRAPHY 9

Principle, interaction of X-Ray with matter, imaging, film and film less techniques, types and use

of filters and screens, geometric factors, Inverse square, law, characteristics of films -

graininess, density, speed, contrast, characteristic curves, Penetrameters, Exposure charts,

Radiographic equivalence. Fluoroscopy- Xero-Radiography, Computed Radiography, Computed

Tomography.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will be able to understand the importance of non-destructive testing.

138

2. The students will be able to explain the procedure involved in methods that evaluate

superficial defects.

3. The students will be able to explain the procedure involved in the Thermography and

Eddy current testing of materials.

4. The students will be able to explain the procedure involved in NDT methods employing

sound energy.

5. The students will be able to explain the procedure involved in testing materials using

electromagnetic rays.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Baldev Raj, T, Jayakumar, M, Thavasimuthu “Practical Non-Destructive Testing”,

Narosa Publishing House, 2012.

2. Ravi Prakash, “Non-Destructive Testing Techniques”, 1st revised edition, New

Age International Publishers, 2010.

REFERENCES :

1. ASM Metals Handbook, “Non-Destructive Evaluation and Quality Control”, American

Society of Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 200, Volume-17.

2. Charles, J. Hellier, “Handbook of Nondestructive evaluation”, McGraw Hill, New York

2001.

3. Paul, E.Mix, “Introduction to Non-destructive testing: a training guide”, Wiley, 2nd Edition

New Jersey, 2005

HAND BOOKS:

1. ASNT (American Society for Non Destructive Testing, Columbus, Ohio) NDT Handbook,

Vol. 1, Leak Testing


Vol. 2, Liquid Penetrant Testing


Vol. 3, Infrared and Thermal Testing


Vol. 4, Radiographic Testing


Vol. 5, Electromagnetic Testing


Vol. 6, Acoustic Emission Testing


Vol. 7, Ultrasonic Testing

WEB RESROURCES:


139

ME 18021 PLANT LAYOUT DESIGN AND ERGONOMICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To equip the students with adequate knowledge of plant layout and material handling

activities carried out in industries

To explain the general principles that govern the interaction of humans and their working

environment for improving worker performance.

To learn principles of ergonomics and methods of ergonomical design

UNIT I PLANT LAYOUT 8

Need for a layout study- Generic steps involved- Types of layout-Product, Process, Fixed

Position, Combined layouts- Factors Influencing layout- Objectives of layout problems- Steps in

layout design - Plant layout Procedure – Steps and Approaches.

UNIT II MATERIAL HANDLING 9

Introduction, Need, Definition and terminologies, types, elements, Material Handling systems,

Material Handling principles, Classification of Material Handling Equipment, Relationship of

material handling to plant layout , Inbound logistics and outbound logistics, Process flow

charting/mapping techniques.

UNIT III PLANT LAYOUT DESIGN 10

Layout study - Classification of layout , Layout procedure – Nadler’s ideal system approach,

Immer’s basic steps, Apple’s layout procedure, Reed’s layout procedure Systematic Layout

planning (SLP), Computerized layout planning procedure – ALDEP, CORELAP, CRAFT;

Trends in computerized layout .

UNIT IV ERGONOMICS 9

Definition – applications of ergonomic principles in the shop floor – work benches – seating

arrangements – layout of electrical panels- switch gears – principles of motion economy –

location of controls – display locations – machine foundations – work platforms, fatigue,

physical and mental strain – incidents of accident – physiology of workers.

UNIT V ERGONOMICS IN DESIGN 9

Psycho physiological Data – Anthropometry, information displays – Man Machine System -

Working Environment –chair and table heights. Strength and force of body movements - Work

station design methods, Evaluation procedures of REBA, RULA.

.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will describe the procedures of plant layout and the steps involved in it.

2. Will outline various material handling equipment’s used in manufacturing industries

3. Students will illustrate types of layout procedure and illustrate steps in layout design.

4. Will explain how ergonomic factors affect productivity in a workplace.

5. Students will be able to outline ergonomics in design and interpret different posture

analysis by using REBA/RULA tools

140

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bridger , R.S, “Introduction to Human Factors and Ergonomics”, CRC Press, Fourth

Edition ,2017

2. James M. Apple, “Plant Layout and Material Handling” John Wiley, 3rd Edition,

1977

REFERENCES :

1. Franics, R.L., and White, J.A, “Facility layout and Location”, Prentice Hall of

India,2002

2. James M Moore, “Plant layout and design”, Macmillan, New York, 1962

3. Martin Helander, “A guide to Ergonomics of Manufacturing”, TMH, 2006

4. Philips,Chandler .A, “Human Factors Engineering”, John Wiley and Sons, 2000

5. Tompkins, White et.al, “Facilities Planning”, John Wiley and Sons, Inc, 2003

WEB RESOURCES:

1. https://www.oshatrain.org/courses/mods/711e.html

https://www.oshatrain.org/courses/mods/711e.html

141

ME 18023 POWER PLANT ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To Provide an overview of Power Plants and the role of Mechanical Engineers in their

operation and maintenance

To understand the underlying principles of operations in Diesel and Gasifier system.

To impart overall knowledge on different types of nuclear power plants, tariff systems

and pollution control.

UNIT I COAL BASED THERMAL POWER PLANTS 12

Rankine cycle -improvisations, Layout of modern coal power plant, Super Critical Boilers, FBC

Boilers, Turbines, Condensers, All types of valves, Boiler Safety valves and relief valves, Pipes

and tubes for boiler pressure parts, Steam & Heat rate, Subsystems of thermal power plants –

Fuel and ash handling, Draught system, Feed water treatment. Binary Cycles and Cogeneration

systems.

UNIT II DIESEL, GAS TURBINE AND COMBINED CYCLE POWER

PLANTS

8

Components of Diesel and Gas Turbine power plants. Combined Cycle Power Plants. Integrated

Gasifier based Combined Cycle systems

UNIT III NUCLEAR POWER PLANTS 7

Basics of Nuclear Engineering, Layout and subsystems of Nuclear Power Plants, Working of

Nuclear Reactors : Boiling Water Reactor (BWR), Pressurized Water Reactor (PWR), Canada

Deuterium-Uranium reactor (CANDU), Breeder, Gas Cooled and Liquid Metal Cooled Reactors.

Safety measures for Nuclear Power plants.

UNIT IV POWER FROM RENEWABLE ENERGY 10

Hydro Electric Power Plants –Classification, Typical Layout and associated components

including Turbines. Principle, Construction and working of Wind, Tidal, OTEC, Solar Photo

Voltaic (SPV), Solar Thermal, Geo Thermal, Biogas and Fuel Cell power systems

UNIT V ENERGY, ECONOMIC AND ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES OF

POWER PLANTS

8

Power tariff types, Load distribution parameters, load curve, Comparison of site selection

criteria, relative merits & demerits, Capital & Operating Cost of different power plants. Pollution

control technologies including Waste Disposal Options for Coal and Nuclear Power Plants -

ESP-Electro Static Preceptor - Repair & Maintenance cost and selling cost.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will be able to describe various sources of energy and types of power plants.

2. Students are capable to analyze different types of steam cycles and it’s efficiencies for a

steam power plant.

3. Students will be familiar with Diesel, and Integrated Gasifier power plants.

4. Students will interpret various types of nuclear reactors and hydraulic power plant and

their components.

142

5. Students will evaluate various performance parameters associated with power plant

systems and interpret economics of power generation and pollution control methods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Nag. P.K., "Power Plant Engineering", Third Edition, Tata McGraw –Hill Publishing

Company Ltd., 2014.

REFERENCES

1. El-Wakil. M.M., "Power Plant Technology", Tata McGraw –Hill Publishing Company

2. Ltd., 2010.

3. Black & Veatch, "Power Plant Engineering",, Springer Publications,1996.

4. Thomas C. Elliott, Kao Chen and Robert C. Swanekamp, "Power Plant Engineering”,

Second Edition, Standard Handbook of McGraw –Hill, 1998.

5. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable energy, Power for a Sustainable Future", Oxford University

Press,2012.

6. N.K. Bansal, Non-Conventional Energy Resources, Vikas Publishing House, 2014.

WEB RESOURCES:



143

GE18551 PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT L T P C

(COMMON TO EC, AE, BT, EE & ME) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To enable the students to gain knowledge about various theories of management from

classical to contemporary approaches.

To enrich the students with the concepts of all management functions and to make them

understand the significance of proper implementation of these functions for the success of

the organization.

To make the students to realize the importance of effective communication for successful

implementations of management functions in the organization.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO MANAGEMENT AND ORGANIZATIONS 9

Definition of Management –Nature of Management-Management as Science or Art-Management

and Administration-Evolution of Management-Contribution of Taylor and Fayol– types of

managers - managerial roles and skills - Organization Culture – Dimensions, strong and weak

culture –External Environment -.specific and general environment – Understanding the global

environment.

UNIT II PLANNING 9

Nature and purpose of planning – Steps Involved in planning process – Types of plans –

management by objectives – Strategic management process– types of corporate strategies -

Planning Tools and Techniques-Forecasting – Benchmarking - Decision making steps and

process

UNIT III ORGANISING 9

Nature and purpose – Formal and informal organization –– Line and staff authority – delegation

of authority – departmentalization by different strategies - centralization and decentralization –

span of control- Human Resource Management – External factors - HR Planning - Recruitment

and Decruitment - selection – selection tools – Orientation – Employee training - Employee

Performance Management – Appraisal methods - Compensation and benefits.

UNIT IV DIRECTING 9

Foundations of individual and group behaviour – motivation – motivation theories – motivational

techniques – job satisfaction – job enrichment – leadership – types and theories of leadership –

communication – process of communication – barrier in communication – effective

communication.

UNIT V CONTROLLING 9

Types of control systems: Market, Bureaucratic, Clan- Importance of control - process of

controlling – Types of control: Feed forward, Concurrent, Feedback -Qualities of effective

control system – Factors affecting control – controlling for organizational performance – control

techniques -budget - Program evaluation and review technique – Information technology in

controlling: opportunities and challenges.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will be able to practice various managerial roles in the enterprise, apply various

managerial approaches to handle complex situations and design planning processes to

attain the decided organizational objectives.

144

2. Given a work environment, students can formulate suitable strategies for the attainment

of the organization goals.

3. For the efficient attainment of organizational objectives, students can group activities as

per the nature of organization and able to effectively execute various human resource

planning activities as required by the organization.

4. Students can execute appropriate motivational and leadership techniques as required by

various situations in the organization.

5. Students can implement various control techniques and communication methods to

monitor the progress of activities and to take corrective measures.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Stephen P. Robbins, Mary Coulter and Agna Fernandez, “Management”, 14th Edition,

Prentice Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2019.

2. Stephen A. Robbins, David A. Decenzo, Sanghamitra, Bhattacharyya, Madhushree

Nanda Agarwal “Fundamentals of Management” 6th Edition, Pearson Education, 2011.

REFERENCES :

1. Harold Koontz & Heinz Weihrich “Essentials of management” 10th edition, Tata Mc

Graw Hill, 2015.

2. JAF Stoner, Freeman R.E and Daniel R Gilbert “Management”, 6th Edition, Pearson

Education, 2004.

3. Heinz Weihrich, Mark V Cannice, and Harold Koontz “Management: A Global,

Innovative and Entrepreneurial Perspective”, 15th Edition, McGrawHill, 2019.

WEB RESOURCES





145

ME 18025 PROCESS PLANNING AND COST ESTIMATION L T P C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

1. To describe the concept of method study and work measurement techniques.

2. To demonstrate the process planning activities that is followed in

manufacturing industries.

3. To estimate the unit cost of a product.

4. To find the time required for manufacturing a product. UNIT I WORK STUDY AND METHOD STUDY 9

Definition, advantages and procedure of work study – Definition, objectives and procedure of

method study. Symbols, flow process charts, flow diagram, machine chart, Process Charts. Work

measurement: Time Study and work sampling – Principles of motion economy. Therblig

symbols, SIMO chart simple problems.

UNIT II PROCESS PLANNING ACTIVITIES 9

Drawing interpretation – Material evaluation and process selection – Production equipment and

tooling selection – Process parameters – Work holding devices – Documents for Process

planning.

UNIT III ECONOMICS OF PROCESS PLANNING 9

Manufacturing cost – Cost strategies – Costing – Materials and its costs – Manufacturing

processes and its costs – Cost comparison – Make or Buy decision – Case studies and Problems.

UNIT IV INTRODUCTION TO COST ESTIMATION 9

Elements of Cost – Determination of product weight and material cost – Labour Cost –

Determination of Direct Labour Cost – Depreciation, Causes of depreciation, Methods of

depreciation calculation – Administrative expenses – Selling and Distributing expenses –

Allocation of overhead expenses – Methods of Estimation – Break Even Analysis for optimum

process selection.

UNIT V PRODUCTION COST ESTIMATION 9

Estimation of Forging Cost – Estimation of cost for Gas cutting, Arc Welding and Gas Welding

– Estimation in Foundry Shop, pattern cost, casting cost – Estimation in sheet metal shop –

Estimation of machining time and cost for Lathe operations – Drilling and Boring – Milling.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will learn method study and work measurement techniques through which

they will find the standard time.

2. Will prepare a process planning sheet by selecting appropriate material, processes,

machines, equipment’s, tools and work holding devices.

3. Will compare the cost of various methods to select best one.

4. Estimating the unit cost of a product by considering various expenditures like manpower,

material, plant, administration, sales, etc.

5. Computing the cycle time required for manufacturing a product by adopting a various

production technique.

146

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Peter Scallan, “Process planning: The Design/Manufacture Interface”, Elsevier Science &

Technology Books, Dec 2002.

REFERENCES :

1. Chitale.A.V, and Gupta.R.C., “Product Design and Manufacturing”, PHI, 2nd Edition,

2002.

2. Ostwalal P.F. and Munez J., “Manufacturing Processes and systems”, 9th Edition, John

Wiley, 1998.

3. Phillip.F. Ostwalal and Jairo Munez, “ Manufacturing Processesss and Systems”, John

Wiley, 9 th Edition, 1998.

4. Russell.R.S and Tailor,B.W., “operations Management”, PHI, 4th Edition, 2003.

5. Sinha.B.P., “Mechanical Estimating and Costing”, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, Publishing Co.,

1995.

WEB RESOURCES:


147

ME 18027 REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the underlying principles of operations in different Refrigeration systems.

This course will give an overall knowledge on different Air conditioning systems

To provide knowledge on design aspects of Refrigeration & Air conditioning systems


Introduction to Refrigeration - Unit of Refrigeration and C.O.P.– Ideal cycles- Refrigerants

Desirable properties – Classification – Nomenclatures.

UNIT II VAPOUR COMPRESSION REFRIGERATION SYSTEM 10

Vapor compression cycle : p-h and T-s diagrams - deviations from theoretical cycle – subcooling

and super heating- effects of condenser and evaporator pressure on COP- multipressure system -

low temperature refrigeration - Cascade systems – problems. Equipments: Type of Compressors,

Condensers, Expansion devices, Evaporators.

UNIT III OTHER REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 8

Working principles of Vapor absorption systems and adsorption cooling systems – Steam jet

refrigeration- Ejector refrigeration systems- Thermoelectric refrigeration- Air refrigeration -

Magnetic Vortex and Pulse tube refrigeration systems

UNIT IV PSYCHROMETRIC PROPERTIES AND PROCESSES 10

Properties of moist Air-Gibbs Dalton law, Specific humidity, Dew point temperature, Degree of

saturation, Relative humidity, Enthalpy, Humid specific heat, Wet bulb temperature

Thermodynamic wet bulb temperature, Psychrometric chart; Psychrometric of air-conditioning

processes, mixing of air streams.

UNIT V AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS AND LOAD ESTIMATION 12

Air conditioning loads: Outside and inside design conditions; Heat transfer through structure,

Solar radiation, Electrical appliances, Infiltration and ventilation, internal heat load; Apparatus

selection; fresh air load, human comfort & IAQ principles, effective temperature & chart,

calculation of summer & winter air conditioning load; Classifications, Layout of plants; Air

distribution system; Filters; Air Conditioning Systems with Controls: Temperature, Pressure and

Humidity sensors, Actuators & Safety controls.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students can interpret the basic concepts of Refrigeration.

2. The students can solve analytical problems in Vapor Compression Refrigeration systems

3. The students will be familiar with the various types of Refrigeration systems and its

psychrometric processes.

4. The students can design and analyze various refrigeration and air conditioning systems

5. The students can estimate the loads of Air conditioning systems

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Arora, C.P., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", 3rd edition, McGraw Hill, New

148

Delhi, 2010.

2. Stoecker, W.F. and Jones J. W., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", 2nd edition,

McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 1982.

REFERENCES :

1. Roy J. Dossat, "Principles of Refrigeration", 4th edition, Pearson Education Asia, 2009.

2. ASHRAE Hand book, Fundamentals, 2017

3. Arora, C.P., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", 3rd edition, McGraw Hill, New ,

2010.

4. Anantanarayanan P.N, “Basic Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, 4th Edition, Tata

Mc GrawHill, 2013.

5. Jones W.P, “Air conditioning engineering”, 5th edition, Elsevier, Butterwoth Hinenmann

Publication, 2005.

WEB RESOURCES



149

ME18029 RENEWABLE ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C

(COMMON TO ME & MR) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To identify the methods and technologies for effective utilization of solar energy, wind

energy and biomass.

To acquire knowledge about wind energy conversion techniques.

To learn how biomass could become an energy source.

To know the energy available in various hydro and geo-based sources in the world and its

conversion

To get educated about various new forms of energy and its effective usage.

UNIT I SOLAR ENERGY 9

Introduction – Renewable vs non-renewable sources of energy, Solar Radiation; Solar collectors -

Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors; Solar Applications – power generation, green houses,

space heating and cooling; Solar Cells - Fundamentals of Solar Photo Voltaic Cells, Power

Generation & Applications

9

UNIT II WIND ENERGY

Wind Energy – Wind data, site selection, power available in wind, Betz criterion; Wind energy

conversion – Principle, evolution of wind mills, Vertical and Horizontal axis wind mills,

Construction and working, Safety and failure.

UNIT III BIO ENERGY 9

Bioenergy – Introduction, energy crops, Biomass, Municipal & Industrial waste stream,

Conversion techniques – Physical means, direct combustion, Thermo chemical and biochemical

methods, Biomass gasifiers, Digesters, Ethanol production, Bio diesel.

UNIT IV HYDRO ENERGY 9

Tidal energy, Ocean Thermal energy - Open and Closed OTEC Cycles, Geothermal Energy, Small

Hydro energy and conversion techniques.

UNIT V OTHER NON-CONVENTIONAL ENERGY TECHNOLOGY 9

Hydrogen – Production & Storage; Fuel Cell – principle, construction, working and limitations of

Alkali, Molten Carbonate, Solid Oxide, Phosphoric acid, Proton Exchange Membrane fuel cells.

Super capacitors.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

1. The students will identify techniques used in direct and indirect usage of solar energy.

2. Students will present effective methods to harvest and convert wind energy into useful

form.

3. Students will be able to recommend a suitable method for deriving energy from various bio

masses.

150

4. Students will get exposed to energy conversion techniques for effective utilization of hydro

and geo-based renewable sources.

5. Students will understand the techniques involved in utilization of energy from new

resources like hydrogen.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Rai. G.D., "Non Conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2011.

2. Twidell, J.W. & Weir, A., "Renewable Energy Sources", EFN Spon Ltd., UK, 2006.

REFERENCES:

1. Sukhatme. S.P., Solar Energy", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd., New Delhi,

1997.

2. Godfrey Boyle, "Renewable Energy, Power for a Sustainable Future", Oxford University

Press, U.K., 1996.

3. Tiwari. G.N., Solar Energy –"Fundamentals Design, Modeling & Applications", Narosa

Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.

4. Freris. L.L., "Wind Energy Conversion Systems", Prentice Hall, UK, 1990.

5. David M. Mousdale – "Introduction to Biofuels", CRC Press, Taylor & Francis Group,

USA 2010

6. Chetan Singh Solanki, “Solar Photovoltaics - Fundamentals, Technologies and

Applications", PHI Learning Private Limited, New Delhi, 2015

WEB RESOURCES:


http://www.iff-training.com/event/mechanics-of-renewable-energy-training-

course?utm_source=google&utm_medium=cpc&utm_content=homepage&xtssot=0

151

ME18031 SURFACE ENGINEERING AND TRIBOLOGY L T P C 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To impart knowledge on surface engineering and surface modification methods that will

come in handy to solve the industrial problems. This will also serve as a precursor for future

research in the same field.

To impart knowledge in the friction, wear, and lubrication aspects of machine components.

To understand the material properties which influence the tribological characteristics of

surfaces

UNIT I SURFACE INTERACTION AND FRICTION 8

Topography of Surfaces – Surface features – Properties and measurement – Surface interaction –

Adhesive Theory of Sliding Friction – Rolling Friction – Friction properties of metallic and non-

metallic materials – friction in extreme conditions.

UNIT II WEAR 9

Introduction – Abrasive wear, Erosive, Cavitation, Adhesion, Fatigue wear and Fretting Wear-

Laws of wear – Theoretical wear models – Wear of metals and non metals – International

standards in friction and wear measurements.

UNIT III CORROSION 10

Introduction – Principle of corrosion – Classification of corrosion – Types of corrosion – Factors

influencing corrosion – Testing of corrosion – In-service monitoring, Simulated service,

Laboratory testing – Evaluation of corrosion – Prevention of Corrosion – Material selection,

Alteration of environment, Cathodic and Anodic Protection.

UNIT IV SURFACE TREATMENTS 10

Introduction – Surface properties, Superficial layer – Changing surface metallurgy – Wear

resistant coatings and Surface treatments – Techniques – PVD – CVD – Physical CVD – Ion

implantation – Thermal spraying – Laser surface hardening and alloying, Applications of

coatings and surface treatments in wear and friction control –New trends in coating technology –

DLC – CNC – Thick coatings – Nano-engineered coatings – Corrosion resistant coatings.

UNIT V LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION REGIMES 8

Lubricants and their physical properties – Viscosity and other properties of oils – Additives and

selection of Lubricants – Lubricant standards ISO, SAE, AGMA, BIS standards – Lubrication

Regimes – Solid Lubrication – Hydrodynamic lubrication – Hydrostatic lubrication – Gas

lubrication.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will get familiarized with the various theories and practices on surface

engineering and friction between the surfaces.

2. Students will be able to make use of the theories and mechanisms of various types of

wear.

3. Promote the students to apply and solve the industrial problems that arise related to

Corrosion of surfaces.

4. Students will be able to analyze the material / surface properties based on the functions of

tribological requirements and surface modification methods/treatments.

5. Students will select suitable lubricants and lubrication regimes for different operating

conditions.

152

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Basu.S.K, Sengupta.S.N and Ahuja.B.B, ”Fundamentals of Tribology” Prentice – Hall of

India Pvt Ltd , New Delhi, 2005.

2. Cameron, A. “Basic Lubrication Theory”, Ellis Herward Ltd., UK, 1981.

3. Fontana G., “Corrosion Engineering”, McGraw Hill, 1985.

4. Halling, J, “Principles of Tribology”, Macmillian – 1984.

5. Rabinowicz.E, “Friction and Wear of materials”, John Willey &Sons ,UK,1995.

6. Stachowiak.G.W and Batchelor.A.W, “Engineering Tribology”, Butterworth -

Heinemann, UK, 2005.

7. Williams J.A. “Engineering Tribology”, Oxford Univ. Press, 1994.

REFERENCES :

1. Avraham Harnoy, “Bearing Design in Machinery: Engineering Tribology and

Lubrication”, Dekker 2007.

2. Giovanni Straffelini, “Friction and Wear: Methodologies for Design and Control”,

Springer 2015.

3. Michael Khonsari.M, “Applied Tribology: Bearing Design and Lubrication”,

WileyBlackwell; 2nd Revised edition, 2008.

4. Stolarsk.T.A, “Tribology in Machine Design, Butterworth”, – Heinemann, UK, 2013.

WEB RESOURCES:





153

PROFESSIONAL ELECTIVE – II,III, VI ( To be chosen during EVEN SEMESTER )

ME 18002 3D PRINTING AND DESIGN L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To learn about additive manufacturing

To learn various additive manufacturing (AM) processes

To understand various post processing methods in AM

To learn various applications of AM in various fields

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ADDITIVE MANUFACTURING 9

Introduction to AM, AM evolution, Distinction between AM & CNC machining, Advantages of

AM, AM process chain: Conceptualization, CAD, conversion to STL, Transfer to AM, STL file

manipulation, Machine setup, build , removal and clean up, post processing.

UNIT II AM PROCESSES 9

Liquid polymer system, discrete particle system, molten material systems, solid sheet system.

UNIT III DESIGN FOR AM 9

Motivation, DFMA concepts and objectives, AM unique capabilities, Exploring design

freedoms, Design tools for AM, Part Orientation, Removal of Supports, Hollowing out parts,

Inclusion of Undercuts and Other Manufacturing Constraining Features, Interlocking Features,

Reduction of Part Count in an Assembly, Identification of markings/ numbers etc. Guidelines for

process selection: selection methods for a part, challenges of selection, example system for

preliminary selection, production planning and control.

UNIT IV POST PROCESSING 9

Support material removal, surface texture improvement, accuracy improvement, aesthetic

improvement, preparation for use as a pattern, property enhancements using non-thermal and

thermal techniques.

UNIT V APPLICATIONS OF AM 9

Functional models, Pattern for investment and vacuum casting, Medical models, art models,

Engineering analysis models, Rapid tooling, new materials development, Bi-metallic parts, Re-

manufacturing. Application examples for Aerospace, defense, automobile, Bio-medical and

general engineering industries.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

At the end of the course, the student will obtain the knowledge of

1. AM, its evolution and importance in Manufacturing

2. Different AM processes in use

3. Design for AM for manufacturing and process selection

4. Different methods for Post-processing of AM parts.

5. Applications of AM in Automobile, Aerospace, Bio-medical etc.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Chua Chee Kai, Leong KahFai, “Rapid Prototyping: Principles & Applications”, World

154

Scientific, 2003.

2. Ian Gibson, David W Rosen, Brent Stucker., “Additive Manufacturing Technologies:

Rapid Prototyping to Direct Digital Manufacturing”, Springer, 2010

REFERENCES :

1. Ali K. Kamrani, Emand Abouel Nasr, “Rapid Prototyping: Theory & Practice”, Springer,

2006.

2. D.T. Pham, S.S. Dimov, Rapid Manufacturing: The Technologies and Applications of

Rapid Prototyping and Rapid Tooling, Springer 2001.

WEB RESOURCES:


2. https://learn-xpro.mit.edu/additive-

manufacturing?utm_medium=sem&utm_source=google&utm_campaign=amx&utm_ter

m=3d%20printing%20course&utm_content=aw-c

155

ME 18004 ADVANCED I.C ENGINES L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the underlying principles of operation of different IC Engines and

components.

To provide knowledge on pollutant formation, control, alternate fuel etc.

To give an in-depth knowledge of various sensors used in IC engine management

systems.

To acquire the knowledge on recent trends in I.C. Engines.

UNIT I SPARK IGNITION ENGINES 9

Mixture requirements –Fuel injection systems –Mono point, Multipoint & Direct injection -

Stages of combustion –Normal and Abnormal combustion –Knock -Factors affecting knock –

Combustion chambers- Electronic spark timing and control.

UNIT II COMPRESSION IGNITION ENGINES 9

Diesel Fuel Injection Systems -Stages of combustion –Knocking –Factors affecting knock –

Direct and Indirect injection systems –Combustion chambers –Fuel Spray behavior –Spray

structure and spray penetration –Air motion -Introduction to Turbocharging.

UNIT III ALTERNATE FUELS & POLLUTANTS FORMATION AND

CONTROL

9

Alcohol, Hydrogen, Compressed Natural Gas-Properties, Suitability, Merits and Demerits -

Engine Modifications. Pollutant –Sources –Formation of Carbon Monoxide, Unburnt

hydrocarbon, Oxides of Nitrogen, Smoke and Particulate matter –Methods of controlling

Emissions

UNIT IV ENGINE ELECTRONICS 9

Application of Microprocessors in IC Engines-Sensors - Air flow, Pressure, Temperature, Speed,

Exhaust gas Oxygen, Knock and Position, Principle of operation, construction and its

characteristics.

UNIT V RECENT TRENDS 9

Air assisted Combustion, Homogeneous charge compression ignition engines –Variable

Geometry turbochargers –Common Rail Direct Injection Systems –Gasoline Direct Injection

Engine, Hybrid Electric Vehicles – NOx Adsorbers - Onboard Diagnostics, Electrical Operated

Thermostat Operation in Automotive Engine Cooling System, Electronic Engine management

system.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students can understand the various operations and combustion chambers of spark

ignition engines

2. The students will be capable to analyze the various operations of compression ignition

engines, stratified charge engine, and low heat rejection engine

3. The students will be familiar with various alternate fuels for IC engines and also interpret

mechanism of various pollutant formation and their control.

4. The students can analyze the effects of various sensors in I.C engine systems.

156

5. The student can interpret the concepts of Electronic Engine Management systems and

recent trends in I.C Engines.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ramalingam. K.K., "Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals", Scitech

Publications,2011.

2. Ganesan.V, "Internal Combustion Engines", V Edition, Tata Mc.Graw Hill, 2012.

3. Tom Denton, “Automotive Electrical and Electronic Systems”, 4th Edition, Taylor and

Francis Publications, 2004

REFERENCES :

1. Mathur. R.B. and R.P. Sharma, "Internal Combustion Engines"., Dhanpat Rai & Sons

2007.

2. Duffy Smith, "Auto Fuel Systems", The Good Heart Willcox Company, Inc., 2003.

3. Eric Chowenitz, "Automobile Electronics", SAE Publications, 1995.

4. B.P. Pundir, “IC Engines Combustion & Emission”, Narosa Publishing House, 2014.

5. John B. Heywood, “Internal Combustion Engines Fundamentals”, McGraw-Hill, 1988.

WEB RESOURCES



157

ME 18006 AUTOMOBILE ELECTRONICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To create a learning on various automotive electronic components and its integration for

automotive development

To provide a thorough understanding of the automotive systems, vehicle dynamics,

electrical and electronic systems used in automobiles

To impart the knowledge of sensors and transducers used in advanced automobiles.

To develop the ability to analyze, simulate, design and verify electronic systems for

controlling mechanical systems in automobiles.

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF AUTOMOBILE ELECTRONICS 6

Components for electronic engine management system, open and closed loop control

strategies, PID control, Look up tables, introduction to modern control strategies like Fuzzy

logic and adaptive control. Parameters to be controlled in SI and CI engines.

UNIT II SENSORS AND ACTUATORS IN AUTOMOBILE 10

Variables to be Measured - Airflow Rate Sensor -Pressure Measurements - Engine Crankshaft

Angular Position Sensor - Magnetic Reluctance Position Sensor - Hall-Effect Position Sensor -

Optical Crankshaft Position Sensor -Throttle Angle Sensor Temperature Sensors - Typical

Coolant Sensor -Sensors for Feedback Control Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor - Oxygen Sensor

Improvements -Knock Sensors - Automotive Engine Control Actuators - Fuel Injection -

Exhaust Gas Recirculation Actuator - Variable Valve Timing - VVP Mechanism Model -

Electric Motor Actuators - Brushless DC Motors - Stepper Motors - Ignition System - Ignition

Coil Operations.

UNIT III ENGINE CONTROL & MONITORING SYSTEMS 10

Engine control functions- Digital Power train Control Systems – Digital Engine Control.

Control Modes for Fuel Control -Discrete Time Idle Speed Control EGR Control -Variable

Valve Timing Control - Electronic Ignition Control -Closed-Loop Ignition Timing -Spark

Advance Correction Scheme - Integrated Engine Control System -Secondary Air Management

- Evaporative Emissions Canister Purge -Automatic System Adjustment-System Diagnosis-

Summary of Control Modes -Engine Crank (Start) -Engine Warm-Up - Open-Loop Control -

Closed-Loop Control -Hard Acceleration -Deceleration and Idle -Fuel delivery systems, MPFI,

Ignition Systems, Compression Ignition Engines – Emission control Management – Hybrid

Power Plants – BAS Electronic stability program (ESP) - Electronic diesel control (EDC).

UNIT IV TRANSMISSION AND SAFETY SYSTEMS & DIAGNOSTICS

SYSTEMS

10

Transmission control – Autonomous cruise control – Braking control, ABS – Traction control,

ESP, ASR – Suspension control – Steering control – Stability control – Parking Assist Systems

– Safety Systems, SRS, Blind Spot Avoidance – Auto transmission electronic control,

Telematics. Automatic Navigation, Future Challenges-Electronic Control System Diagnostics

Service Bay Diagnostic Tool - Onboard Diagnostics -Model-Based Sensor Failure Detection -

Diagnostic Fault Codes - Onboard Diagnosis (OBD II) -Model-Based Misfire Detection

System -Expert Systems in Automotive Diagnosis Occupant Protection Systems.

UNIT V AUTOMOBILE INSTRUMENTATION AND INFOTAINMENT 9

Modern Automotive Instrumentation -Advantages of Computer-Based Instrumentation

Display Devices - LED - LCD - Flat Panel Display -Fuel Quantity Measurement - Coolant

Temperature Measurement - Oil Pressure Measurement - Vehicle Speed Measurement -High-

158

Speed Digital Communications (CAN) - CAN Network -Trip Information Computer -

Telematics -GPS Navigation -The GPS System Structure -Automotive Diagnostics.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The learners will know to various automobile sensor components and its working.

2. The students will gain knowledge in various engine control and monitoring

mechatronics systems

3. The will gain knowledge in automobile transmission safety systems and diagnostics

4. The students will gain the knowledge on integration of various components in the

automobile systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Robert N Brady, “Automotive Computers and Digital Instrumentation”, Prentice Hall,

Eagle Wood Cliffs, New Jersey, 1988.

REFERENCES :

1. Crouse W.H. “Automobile Electrical Equipment” McGraw Hill Book Co., Inc., New

York 3rd edition, 1986.

2. R.K. Jurgen, “Automotive Electronics Handbook”, McGraw Hill 2nd Edition, 1999

3. Tom Weather Jr. and Cland C. Hunter, “Automotive Computers and Control System”

Prentice Hall Inc., New Jersey, 1984.

4. William B. Riddens, “Understanding Automotive Electronics”, Kindle edition-Butter

worth Heinemann Woburn, 2017.

5. Young A.P. and Griffths, L., “Automobile Electrical Equipment” English Language

Book Society and New Press, 1990.

WEB RESOURCES:

https://www.automotivelectronics.com/

https://www.automotivelectronics.com/

159

ME18008 BIOGAS ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To acquire knowledge on production, processing and application of Biogas and Municipal

solid waste.

To design, construct and operate the biogas plants

To aware the application of biogas in energy production


Bio-Energy. Overview of biogas technology. Technical status of biogas technology. Economic

viability of biogas technology. Diffusion status of biogas technology in developing countries.

Biogas technology scenario in India.

UNIT II BIO-REACTORS 10

Types of bio-reactors- Constant pressure type reactors, Ganesh model, Pragathi model, Astra

model, Jwala biogas plant, Batch digester, Manawat digester, German designs, plastic bag

digesters, free fabricated steel/plastic digesters, Tunnel type digester, Maya Farms model, Large

Farm biogas plants, Anaerobic Contact reactors, Anaerobic Filter reactors.

UNIT III DESIGN,CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION

OF BIOGAS PLANTS

9

Design of the digester. Design based on End Use requirements. Scaling of biogas plants - GTZ

method - digester sizing for a given end use device efficiency. Optimal design -KVIC. Design of

fixed Dome type of digesters. Material estimate for fixed dome plants. Selection of type and size

of biogas reactors and their specifications. Constructional aspects. Operational problems in

biogas plants methods of improving plant productivity. Measuring and test programs.

UNIT IV APPLICATION OF BIOGAS SYSTEMS 9

Biogas as an alternative energy source. Biogas utilization. Biogas burners. Design of biogas

burners. Stove models. Lighting mantles. Biogas using stationary power plants. Mobile power

plants. Pollution control through anaerobic digestion.

UNIT V BIOGAS FROM MUNICIPAL SOLID WASTE 8

Compost and Biogas- biochemical degradation, Anaerobic processing, stages in composting,

composting technologies. Environmental effects of composting.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will be familiar with the materials for biogas production and their

byproducts.

2. The students will get exposure on the working of biogas reactors and bio-plants.

3. The students will be able to design, construct and operate the biogas plants

4. The students will interpret the applications biogases in power generation

5. The students will familiar in MSW, processes of composting, and composting

technologies.

160

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Rai G D, Non-Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, 2011.

2. Khandelwal K C and Mahdi S S, Biogas Technology, Vol. I, Tata McGraw Hill, 1986.

REFERENCES :

1. McDougall, F. R., White, P. R., Franke, M., and Hindle, P. Integrated Solid Waste

Management: A Life Cycle Inventory, Blackwell Science, UK, 2001.

2. Fulford, D. Running A Biogas Programme: A Handbook, IntermediateTechnology

Publications, UK, 1998.

3. David M. Mousdale, Introduction to Biofuels, CRC Press, 2010

4. Nijaguna B T, Biogas Technology, New Age International Publishers, New Delhi, 2002.

5. Frank Stephan, “Biogas Technology”, Fachhochschule Koln Hochschule, Bremerhaven,

Germany, 1985.

WEB RESOURCES:

http://nptel.ac.in/courses/103107125/26


161

ME18010 COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS L T P C

(COMMON TO ME & AE) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To expose the students to the basics of CFD and the procedures.

To acquire knowledge of finite difference and finite volume methods

To acquire the ability to solve the problems using finite volume method

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND GOVERNING EQUATIONS 9

Introduction - Impact and applications of CFD in diverse fields - Governing equations of fluid

dynamics – Continuity - Momentum and energy - Generic integral form for governing equations

- Initial and Boundary conditions - Governing equations for boundry layers -Classification of

partial differential equations – Hyperbolic - Parabolic - Elliptic and Mixed types - Applications

and relevance.

UNIT II FINITE DIFFERENCE METHOD 9

Derivation of finite difference equations – Simple Methods – General Methods for first and

second order accuracy – solution methods for finite difference equations – Elliptic equations –

Iterative solution Methods – Parabolic equations – Explicit and Implicit schemes.

UNIT III FINITE VOLUME METHOD (FVM) FOR CONDUCTION 9

Finite volume formulation for steady state one and two -dimensional diffusion problems. One

dimensional unsteady heat conduction through Explicit, Crank – Nicolson and fully implicit

schemes.

UNIT IV FINITE VOLUME METHOD FOR CONVECTION 9

Steady one-dimensional convection– Central, upwind differencing schemes-properties of

discretization schemes – Conservativeness, Boundedness, Transportiveness, Hybrid, Power-law,

QUICK Schemes.

UNIT V CALCULATION FLOW FIELD BY FVM 9

Representation of the pressure gradient term and continuity equation – Staggered grid –

Momentum equations – Pressure and Velocity corrections – Pressure Correction equation,

SIMPLE algorithm and its variants. Turbulence models, mixing length model, two equation (k-

Є) models.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will establish the mathematical representation of the governing equations of

fluid flow and heat transfer.

2. The students will be able to choose and apply explicit, implicit and semi-implicit methods

of finite differencing based on applications.

3. The students will recommend the suitable governing equations to formulate numerical

solutions for conduction problems using finite volume method.

4. The students will prioritize different schemes used for convection problems using finite

volume methods.

162

5. The students will appraise the knowledge of CFD techniques, basic aspects of

discretization and grid generation.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Jiyan Tu, Guan Heng Yeoh, Chaoqun Liu, “Computational Fluid Dynamics : A Practical

Approach”, Second edition, Elsevier Ltd, 2018.

2. MuralidharK and Sundararajan T, “Computational Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer”,

Narosa Publishing House, New Delhi, 2014.

3. Versteeg H.K, “An Introduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics, The Finite Volume

Method”, Pearson Publication, Second edition, 2008.

REFERENCES :

1. Anderson. J.D, “Computational Fluid Dynamics- The Basic with Applications”, Tata

McGraw Hill Publishing Company Pvt Ltd., New Delhi,2004

2. Hoffman K.A, “Computational Fluid Dynamics for Engineering”, Engineering Education

System, Austin, Texas 1989.

3. Chung T.J, “Computational Fluid Dynamics”, Cambridge University Press,2003.

4. Sreenivas Jeyanthi, “Computational Fluid Dynamics for Engineers and Scientists”,

Springer, 2018.

WEB RESOURCES:

https://www.mie.utoronto.ca/



163

ME 18012 DESIGN OF EXPERIMENTS L T P C

(COMMON TO ME, AE, CE & CH) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To acquire knowledge about Design of experiments

Understand various aspects of DoE

Design experiments based on problem description

Offer optimized solution for a given problem

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF EXPERIMENTATION 7

Role of experimentation in rapid scientific progress, Historical perspective of experimental

approaches, Steps in experimentation, Principles of experimentation.

UNIT II COMPARATIVE EXPERIMENTS 9

Basic concepts of probability and statistics, Comparison of two means and two variances,

Comparison of multiple (more than two) means & ANOVA

UNIT III EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN 11

Factorial designs, fractional factorial designs, orthogonal arrays, standard orthogonal arrays &

interaction tables, modifying the orthogonal arrays, selection of suitable orthogonal array design,

analysis of experimental data

UNIT IV RESPONSE SURFACE METHODOLOGY 9

Concept, linear model, steepest ascent, second order model, regression, optimization

UNIT V TAGUCHI TECHNIQUE 9

Taguchi’s Parameter Design: Concept of robustness, noise factors, objective function & S/N

ratios, inner-array and outer-array design, data analysis

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

At the end of the course, the student shall be able to:

1. Formulate objective(s) and identify key factors in designing experiments for a given

problem.

2. Develop appropriate experimental design to conduct experiments for a given problem.

3. Analyze experimental data to derive valid conclusions.

4. Optimize process conditions by developing empirical models using experimental data.

5. Design robust products and processes using parameter design approach.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Montgomery DC, Design and Analysis of Experiments, 7thEdition, John Wiley & Sons,

NY, 2008.

2. Krishnaiah K,Shahabudeen P, Applied design of experiments and Taguchi method, Second

edition,PHI,2012

164

REFERENCES :

1. Daniel Coleman, Belt Gunter , A DOE, Handbook, Createsapce publisher, 2013.

2. Ross PJ, Taguchi Techniques for Quality Engineering, McGraw-Hill Book Company,

NY, 2008.

WEB RESOURCES



165

ME 18014 DIGITAL MANUFACTURING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To learn a basic concepts of NC, CNC machines and adaptive control system

To study the different Mechatronics and Mechanical elements in CNC machines.

To learn different CNC measuring system and tooling.

To practice CNC programming

To study the maintenance of different CNC machine elements.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION OF NC, CNC, DNC AND ADAPTIVE CONTROL 6

Classification of machine tools – types, functions and processes - fundamentals of NC and CNC

technologies Adaptive control - types, application and benefits - general configuration of

adaptive control and function – reasons for process change -practical problems with adaptive

control - example for feedback and adaptive control. UNIT II MECHATRONIC ELEMENTS IN CNC MACHINE TOOLS 10

CNC systems - configuration of the CNC system – interfacing – monitoring – diagnostics

machine data - compensations for machine accuracies - PLC in CNC – PLC programming for

CNC, steps in programming and case studies - machine structure -types of loads on CNC

machine - guide ways and types - mechanical transmission elements - elements for rotary motion

to linear motion - ball screw and types -roller screw and types -rack and pinion - various torque

transmission elements -requirements of feed drives and spindle drive.

UNIT III MECHATRONICS ELEMENT IN CNC MEASURING SYSTEM AND

TOOLING

10

Measuring systems - feedback devices - velocity feedback -analog and digital - position feedback

- rotary and linear. Tooling - requirement and planning -preset, qualified and semi qualified

tools. Fixtures – requirement - unified and modular fixtures -tool identification - touch trigger

probe- tool coding -EEPROM tools. 19 Tool condition monitoring - various indirect and direct

methods. Identification and gauging of work piece. Tool locking system -ball lock mechanism

and contact pressure monitoring. Automatic tool changing system - types and benefits -tool

magazine

UNIT IV CNC PROGRAMMING 14

Machine axes identification - primary, secondary and tertiary -manual CNC programming -

Milling programming fundamentals -compensation and offset in milling -fixed cycles in milling -

repetitive programming - loops, sub programs and macros. Turning programming fundamentals -

compensation and offset in turning -fixed cycles in turning. Computer assisted programming in

APT - basic geometry definition -cutter motion definition -postprocessor statements -generation

and execution of APT programs.

UNIT V TESTING AND MAINTENANCE OF CNC MACHINES 5

Verification of technical specification and functional aspects, Verification during idle running &

machine tool and the work piece accuracy -Installation of CNC machines -Maintenance of CNC

machines - machine elements – hydraulic elements -electrical and electronic elements –

maintenance schedules.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will be able to learn basic concepts of NC, CNC machines and adaptive

control system.

166

2. The students will be exposed to different Mechatronics and Mechanical elements in CNC

machines.

3. The students will be able study different CNC measuring system and tooling.

4. The students will be able to practice CNC programming

5. The students will be able to study the maintenance of different CNC machine elements.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Groover, M.P., “Automation, Production System and CIM”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt.

Ltd, 2003.

2. HMT Limited, “Mechatronics”, Tata Mcgraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd, 2008.

3. Jonathan Lin S.C., “Computer Numerical Control (From Programming to Networking)”,

Delmar Publishers Inc., 2000.

4. Radhakrishnan P., “CNC Machine”, New Central Book Agency, 2000.

REFERENCES :

1. Grahamt.Smith, “Advanced Machining: The Handbook of Cutting Technology”, IFS

Publications Ltd., 1989

2. HMT Limited, “Mechatronics”, Tata Mcgraw-Hill Publishing Co Ltd, 2008.

3. Jayakumar,V., and Mahendran,B., “Computer Aided Manufacturing”, Lakshmi

Publications, 2013.

4. Radhakrishnan,P., “CNC Machine”, New Central Book Agency, 2000.

5. Sehrawatt,M.S., and Narang,J.S., “CNC Machine”, DhanpatRai And Co, 2002.

6. Stenerson and Curran, “Computer Numerical Control-Operation and Programming”, PHI

Learning Pvt. Ltd., 2008 .

WEB RESOURCES:





5. https://www.coursera.org/specializations/digital-manufacturing-design-technology

6. https://www.edx.org/course/introduction-to-computer-numerical-control

7. https://www.cnccookbook.com/online-cnc-training-courses-guides-help/





https://www.coursera.org/specializations/digital-manufacturing-design-technology

https://www.edx.org/course/introduction-to-computer-numerical-control

https://www.cnccookbook.com/online-cnc-training-courses-guides-help/

167

ME 18016 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the fundamental economic concepts applicable to engineering

To learn the various interest formulae and their applications in real time situations

To compare the mutually exclusive alternatives and select the feasible one that will yield

more revenue and involves less cost.

To Decide the replacement policy that determines the optimal replacement age of equipment,

instead of using with higher maintenance costs for long time

Learn the techniques of incorporating inflation factor in economic decision making,

comparing the total expected cost of each option with its total expected benefits and to learn

the various types of depreciation

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO ECONOMICS 9

Introduction to Economics – Flow in an economy, Law of supply and demand, Factors affecting

the law of demand and supply, Elasticity of demand and supply, Concept of Engineering

Economics – Engineering efficiency, Economic efficiency, Scope of engineering economics –

Element of costs, Marginal cost, Marginal Revenue, Sunk cost, Opportunity cost, Break Even

Analysis – Profit/Volume ratio, Elementary economic Analysis: Material selection for a product,

Design selection for a product, Process planning.

UNIT II TIME VALUE OF MONEY 9

Interest formulae and their applications – Single payment compound amount – Single payment

present worth amount – Equal payment series compound amount – Equal payment series sinking

fund – Equal payment series Present worth amount – Equal payment series capital recovery

amount – Arithmetic Gradient series relating to its present worth, future worth and annual worth,

Geometric gradient series relating to annual equivalent amount, present worth amount and future

worth amount – Nominal and Effective interest rate.

UNIT III COMPARISON OF ALTERNATIVES 9

Methods of comparison of alternatives – Present Worth Method (Revenue-dominated cash flow

diagram, Cost-dominated cash flow diagram), Future Worth Method (Revenue-dominated cash

flow diagram, cost-dominated cash flow diagram), Annual Equivalent Method (Revenue-

dominated cash flow diagram, cost-dominated cash flow diagram), Rate of Return Method.

UNIT IV REPLACEMENT AND MAINTENANCE ANALYSIS 9

Introduction – Types of maintenance – Types of replacement problem – Determination of

economic life of an asset – Replacement of an asset with a new asset – capital recovery with

return, concept of challenger and defender – Simple probabilistic model for items which fail

completely.

UNIT V DEPRECIATION, INFLATION AND BENEFIT COST ANALYSIS 9

Introduction – Methods of depreciation – Straight line method, declining balance method, Sum of

the years digits method, sinking fund method /Annuity method, service output method –

Evaluation of public alternatives – introduction, Examples. Inflation adjusted decisions –

procedure to adjust inflation, Examples on comparison of alternatives and determination of

economic life of asset.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

168

1. Students will understand the concepts of economics and apply the economic principles in

material selection, process planning activities and in design selection of a product.

2. Given a problem statement, the student will draw the cash flow diagram and will relate

the examples of the time value of money in respect to real time economic problems

3. The students will solve economic problems in the selection of project alternatives by

using variety of analytical techniques including present worth analysis, Future worth

analysis, Annual worth analysis, rate of return analysis

4. Students will decide the best policy to adopt with regard to replacement of an equipment

that degrade gradually and for the components that fail suddenly.

5. Students will apply the techniques of incorporating inflation factor in economic decision

making, evaluate the public sector projects and learn about the different depreciation

methods

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Panneer Selvam, R, “Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India Ltd, New Delhi,

2013.

2. Zahid A khan, Arshad Noor Siddiquee and Brajesh Kumar "Engineering Economy",

Dorling Kindersley, 2012.

REFERENCES :

1. Chan S.Park, “Contemporary Engineering Economics”, Prentice Hall of India, 2011.

2. Donald.G. Newman, Jerome.P.Lavelle, “Engineering Economics and analysis” Engg.

Press, Texas, 2010.

3. Degarmo, E.P., Sullivan, W.G and Canada, J.R, “Engineering Economy”, Macmillan,

New York, 2011.

4. Patra K K and Dhiraj Bhattacharjee, “Engineering Economics and Costing”, S. Chand &

Company, 2013.

5. A Ramachandra Aryasri & V V Ramana Murthy, “Engineering Economics and Financial

Accounting”, McGraw Hill Education India Private Limited, 2015.

WEB RESOURCES


2. https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-engineering-economic-analysis-9919


https://www.classcentral.com/course/swayam-engineering-economic-analysis-9919

169

ME18018 ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To illustrate the importance of entrepreneurship as alternate career for students.

To demonstrate the role of motivation and attitude which are required for becoming a

successful entrepreneur.

To learn the basic skills required for establishing small enterprises or start-ups..

UNIT I ENTREPRENEURSHIP 9

Entrepreneur – Types of Entrepreneurs – Difference between Entrepreneur and Intrapreneur –

Entrepreneurship in Economic Growth, Factors Affecting Entrepreneurial Growth.

UNIT II MOTIVATION 9

Motivation Theories – Motivating factors – Achievement Motivation: Achieve Motivation

Training – AMT tools: Self Rating, Business Games, Thematic Apperception Test –

Entrepreneurial competencies – Entrepreneurship Development Programs – Need, Objectives,

content, phases, evaluation.

UNIT III BUSINESS 9

Small Enterprises – Definition, Characteristics, role of small enterprises in economic

development – Project Formulation – content and formulation of a project report – Project

Appraisal – concept and methods – Ownership Structures – Market Survey and Research,

Techno Economic Feasibility Assessment – Preliminary Project Report – Start-ups.

UNIT IV FINANCING AND ACCOUNTING 9

Sources of Finance – Term Loans – Financial Institutions – working capital management –

Accounting process, journal, ledger, trial balance, profit loss account, balance sheet – Taxation

and benefits for small enterprises and start-ups.

UNIT V SUPPORT TO ENTREPRENEURS 9

Sickness in small Business – Concept, Signal and symptoms, Causes and Consequences,

Corrective Measures – Business Incubators – Government Policy for Small Enterprises and start-

ups – Growth Strategies in small enterprises – Expansion, Diversification, Joint Venture, Merger

and Sub Contracting.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will understand the importance of entrepreneurship and its role in economic

development.

2. Exposed to Achievement Motivation Training and Entrepreneurship Development

Program that will help in developing their character and attitude towards

entrepreneurship.

3. The Students will prepare a business plan

4. Familiarize about all type of financial institutions to get financial aid for starting small

business.

5. Will be exposed to state and central government schemes that are supporting small

170

entrepreneurs and start-ups.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Khanka S S, "Entrepreneurial Development", S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 2010.

REFERENCES :

1. Hisrich R D, Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 8 th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2013.

2. Mathew J Manimala, "Entrepreneurship theory at cross roads: paradigms and praxis” 2nd

Edition Dream tech, 2005.

3. Rajeev Roy, "Entrepreneurship", 2 nd Edition, Oxford University Press, 2011.

WEB RESOURCES:


171

AE 18602 HYBRID AND ELECTRIC VEHICLES L T P C

(COMMON TO AE & ME) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the basic concept of Hybrid and Electric Vehicle.

To understand the basic concept of energy Storage devices.

To familiarise about electric drives and its controllers.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO NEED FOR ALTERNATIVE SYSTEM 9

History of electric and hybrid vehicles. Need of electric and hybrid vehicles – comparative

study of diesel, petrol, electric and hybrid vehicles. Limitations of electric vehicles.

Specification of different electric and hybrid vehicles.

UNIT II ENERGY STORAGE DEVICES AND FUELL CELLS 9

Electromechanical batteries- types of batteries –lead acid batteries, nickel based batteries,

lithium based batteries, electrochemical reactions, thermodynamic voltage, specific energy,

specific power, energy efficiency and ultra-capacitors.

Fuel Cell- Fuel cell characteristics- Fuel cell types-Hydrogen fuel cell- Connecting cell in

series- water management in the PEM fuel cell- Thermal Management of the PEM fuel cell.

UNIT III ELECTRIC VEHICLES 9

Electric vehicle layout, performance of electric vehicles – traction motor characteristics,

tractive effort, transmission requirements, vehicle performance, energy consumption,

advantage and limitations, specifications, system components, electronic control system,

safety and challenges in electric vehicles.

UNIT IV HYBRID VEHICLES 9

Concepts of hybrid electric drive train, types, architecture of series and parallel hybrid

electric drive train, merits and demerits, hybrid electric drive train design, mild and full

hybrids, plug-in hybrid electric vehicles and range extended hybrid electric vehicles.

UNIT V PROPULSION MOTORS AND CONTROLLERS 9

Types of electric motors – working principle of AC and DC motors. Characteristic of shunt,

series and compound type of DC motors- permanent magnet and separately exited DC

motors. AC single phase and 3-phase motor – inverters – DC and AC motor speed

controllers.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

To know about the alternative systems and the need for it.

To get familiarize about various energy storage devices and fuel cells.

Ability to understand the electric vehicle system.

Ability to understand the concepts of HEV, PHEV and its architecture.

To get fundamental knowledge of electric drive train and various controllers used in

EV and HEV.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mehrdad Ehsani, “ Modern Electric, Hybrid Electric and Fuel Cell Vehicles”, CRC

Press, 2005.

172

2. Iqbal Husain, “ Electric and Hybrid Vehicles-Design Fundamentals”, CRC Press,

2003

James Larminie and John Lowry, “Electric Vehicle Technology Explained “ John Wiley

& Sons, 2003.

REFERENCES :

1. Ron HodKinson, “ Light Weight Electric/ Hybrid Vehicle Design”, Butterworth

Heinemann Publication, 2005.

2. Lino Guzzella, “ Vehicle Propulsion System”, Springer Publications, 2005.

WEB RESOURCES





173

ME 18020 INDUSTRIAL ROBOTICS L T P C

(COMMON TO ME & AE & MR) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To teach students the basics of robotics, construction features, sensor applications, robot

cell design, robot programming and application of artificial intelligence and expert

systems in robotics.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION AND DRIVE SYSTEM 9

Robot – Definition - Need for robots - Classification based on coordinate system - Control

method – Work envelope. Robot motion – Types & joints, wrist – pitch, roll, yaw. Joint notation

scheme, Payload, Robot specification. Drive system – Hydraulic – Pneumatic – Electric and its

comparision.

UNIT II END EFFECTORS AND ROBOT KINEMATICS 9

End Effectors – Grippers – Mechanical grippers – Gripper mechanisms, Magnetic gripper,

Vaccum gripper – Inflatable gripper; Internal and External gripper; Gripper selection – Tool as

end effectors – Gripper force analysis. Forward and Inverse kinematics of manipulator with two

three Degrees of Freedom (DOF) in two-dimensional space – four degrees of freedom in three-

dimensional space. (Elementary treatment only)

UNIT III SENSORS AND MACHINE VISION 9

Transducers and Sensors – Sensor categories - Tactile array sensor – Touch -Proximity and range

sensors – Compliance sensor – Sensing wrist forces - Sensing joint forces.

Function of machine vision system – Sensing and Digitizing, Imaging devices – CCD –

Videocon camera, Lighting techniques. Image Processing and Analysis – Image data reduction –

segmentation – Feature extraction – Object recognition. Training of vision system.

UNIT IV ROBOT PROGRAMMING AND ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE 9

Methods of Robot Programming – Robot programming – Lead through – manual – Powered –

Textural robot languages – Robot program as a path in space – Defining position in space –

Reason for defining points – Speed control – Motion interpolation.

Artificial intelligence – Basics – Goals of artificial intelligence – AI techniques – Problem

representation and problem solving – Search techniques in problem solving.

UNIT V ROBOT CELL DESIGN, ECONOMICS AND APPLICATION 9

Robot cell layouts – Multiple robots and machine interference – Work cell design and control –

Safety in robotics. Implementation of robots in industries – various steps; Economic analysis of

robots – Pay back method – EUAC (Equivalent Uniform Annual Cost Method). Industrial

application of robots – Introduction to COBOTS.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The student will be able to select a particular type of actuator on his requirements.

2. The student will be able to solve simple problems in forward and inverse kinematics.

3. Students will be able to select appropriate sensors; the right lighting techniques and a

suitable vision system based on the industry need.

4. Students will be able to select the programming methods in robots and problem-solving

techniques in AI.

174

5. The students will be able to design robots work cells.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Groover,M.P., Weis,M., Nagel,R.N. and Odrey,N.G., “Industrial Robotics Technology,

Programming and Applications”, Mc Graw-Hill, Int., 1986.

REFERENCES :

1. Deb, S.R.” Robotics Technology and Flexible Automation”, Tata Mc Graw-Hill, 1994.

2. Jordanides,T. and Torby,B.J., ,”Expert Systems and Robotics “, Springer –Verlag, New

York, May 1991.

3. K.S.Fu, Gonzalez, R.C. and Lee, C.S.G., “Robotics Control, Sensing, Vision and

Intelligence”, McGraw Hill, 1987.

4. Klafter,R.D., Chmielewski, T.A. and Negin,M., “Robotics Engineering – An Integrated

Approach”, Prentice-Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 1984.

5. Koren,Y., “Robotics for Engineers”, McGraw-Hill, 1987.

6. Kozyrey, Yu. “Industrial Robots”, MIR Publishers Moscow, 1985.

WEB RESOURCES







175

ME18022 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY, MAINTENANCE AND ETHICS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To impart the knowledge on safety rules in industry and protection of machines.

To familiarize standards, regulations and testing methods in engineering problems in

machine and accessories

To endow about the planning for maintenance practices.

To provide the knowledge on preventive maintenance and condition monitoring.

To bring into the light of the ethical principles in engineering industry

UNIT I INDUSTRIAL SAFETY & PRINCIPLES OF MACHINE GUARDING 10

General safety rules, principles, maintenance, Inspections different types of machines, safety

principles, electrical guards, work area, material handling, inspection, standards and codes- saws,

types, hazards. Guarding during maintenance, Zero Mechanical State (ZMS), Definition, Policy

for ZMS – guarding of hazards - point of operation protective devices, machine guarding, types,

fixed guard, interlock guard, automatic guard, trip guard, electron eye, positional control guard,

fixed guard fencing- guard construction- guard opening Selection and suitability.

UNIT II SAFETY IN FINISHING, INSPECTION AND TESTING 9

Heat treatment operations, electro plating, paint shops, sand and shot blasting, safety in

inspection and testing, dynamic balancing, hydro testing, valves, boiler drums and headers,

pressure vessels, air leak test, steam testing, safety in radiography, personal monitoring devices,

radiation hazards, engineering and administrative controls, Indian Boilers Regulation.

UNIT III PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICES OF MAINTENANCE PLANNING 9

Basic Principles of maintenance planning – Objectives and principles of planned maintenance

activity – Importance and benefits of sound Maintenance systems – Reliability and machine

availability – MTBF, MTTR and MWT – Factors of availability – Maintenance economics

UNIT IV PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, CONDITION BASED

MONITORING

9

Maintenance categories – Comparative merits of each category – Preventive maintenance,

maintenance schedules - TPM. Condition Monitoring – Cost comparison with and without CM –

On-load testing and offload testing – Methods and instruments for CM – Temperature sensitive

tapes – Pistol thermometers.

UNIT V ENGINEERING ETHICS 8

Senses of “Engineering Ethics‟ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas –

Moral Autonomy – Kohlberg‟s theory – Gilligan‟s theory – Consensus and Controversy –

Models of professional roles – Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion

– Uses of Ethical Theories.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will understand the rules and principles in safety, maintenance in machines and

material handling systems.

2. Students will comprehend and apply the heat treatments, plating, painting and some

mechanical operations. Also they will be proficient in employing the leak testing ,

radiography hazards and personal monitoring

176

3. Will be proficient in applying the economical maintenance activity plan and reliability of

the systems. Also they will interpret the emergency planning for chemical industry

problems

4. Understanding and applying in preventive schedules and competent in applying the

condition monitoring.

5. Will understand and strengthen their moral values in their profession and personal life.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Bhattacharya S.N., “Installation, Servicing and Maintenance”, S. Chand and Co., 1995.

2. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, 2nd edition

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2004.

3. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, 4th edition Tata

McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2005.

4. Srivastava S.K.,“Industrial Maintenance Management”,- S. Chand and Co., 1998.

5. Venkataraman .K “Maintancence Engineering and Management”, PHI Learning, Pvt.

Ltd., 2007.

REFERENCES :

1. Armstrong, “Condition Monitoring”, BSIRSA, 1988. 5th edition. Davies, “Handbook of

Condition Monitoring”, Chapman & Hall, 1998.

2. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004

3. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics –

Concepts and Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.

4. Garg M.R., “Industrial Maintenance”, S. Chand& Co., 2010.

5. Grimaldi ,John V and Rollin, H. Simonds, “Safety Management”, All India Travelers

Book seller, New Delhi, 1989.

6. ‘Health and Safety in welding and Allied processes”, Welding Institute UK, High Tech.

Publishing Ltd., London, 1989.

7. John R Boatright, “Ethics and the Conduct of Business”, Pearson Education, New Delhi,

2003.

8. Krishnan N.V “Safety in Industry” Jaico Publishers House, 1996.

9. White E.N., “Maintenance Planning”, I Documentation, 2 nd edition, Gower Press, 1988.

HAND BOOKS:

1. “Accident Prevention Manual”, NSC, Chicago, 1982.

2. Higgins L.R., “Maintenance Engineering Hand book”, McGraw Hill, 7th Edition, 2008.

3. “Indian Boiler acts and Regulations”, IBR codes, Government of India

4. “Occupational safety Manual”, BHEL Trichy, 1988.

177

WEB RESOURCES

1. https://www.osha.gov

2. https://www.iti.com › safety

3. https://www.iti.com › maintenance

https://www.iti.com/maintenance

https://www.iti.com/maintenance

178

ME 18024 MICRO CONTROLLERS AND EMBEDDED SYSTEM L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

By the end of the course students will become thoroughly familiar with the elements of

microcontroller software, hardware, types of machine tools, their specifications and

operations performed.

To provide the overview of embedded system design principles

To understand the concepts of real time operating systems

To impart the knowledge on networking.

UNIT I MICRO CONTROLLER 9

8051 Hardware Architecture, pin diagram – Functional Building Blocks of Processor –

Memory organization – I/O ports and data transfer concepts– Comparing Microprocessors and

Microcontrollers - Serial Communication – Interrupts-Introduction to Arduino.

UNIT II MICRO CONTROLLER PROGRAMMING & APPLICATIONS 9

Data Transfer, Manipulation, Control Algorithms& I/O instructions – Simple programming

exercises-key board and display interface – Closed loop control of servo motor- stepper motor

control – Washing Machine Control.

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO EMBEDDED SYSTEMS 9

Overview of embedded systems, embedded system design process, challenges - common

design metrics and optimizing them. Hardware - Software codesign embedded product

development.

UNIT IV REAL TIME OPERATING SYSTEM 9

Real time operating systems Architecture - Tasks and Task states - Tasks and Data -

Semaphore and shared data - Message queues, mail boxes and pipes - Encapsulating

semaphores and queues - interrupt routines in an RTOS Environment. Introduction to Vx

works, RT Linux.

UNIT V PIC MICROCONTROLLER AND NETWORKING 9

PIC Architecture - Instruction set - Addressing modes - Timers - Interrupt logic - CCP

modules – ADC. Networking: Introduction - CAN BUS - I2C - GSM - GPRS - Zig bee.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will distinguish the feature of the 8085 microprocessor, Hardware

Architecture and PIN diagram. The students will be able to explain the construction

details and will prepare the operation planning sheet for a given part diagram

2. Students will acquire the knowledge on architecture and programming of

Microcontroller 8051.

3. Students will explore the need of embedded systems and their development procedures

and summaries the concepts involved in Real time operating systems.

4. Students will use various tools for developing embedded applications.

5. Students will be familiar in construction, addressing modes and instructions sets of

PIC micro controller.

179

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Krishna Kant, “Microprocessor and Microcontrollers”, Eastern Company Edition,

Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2007.

2. Muhammad Ali Mazidi & Janice GilliMazidi, R.D.Kinely ‘The 8051 Micro Controller

and Embedded Systems’, PHI Pearson Education, 5th Indian reprint, 2003.

REFERENCES :

1. Frank Vahid, Tony John Givargis, Embedded System Design: A Unified Hardware/

Software Introduction - Wiley and Sons, Inc.2012.

2. Rajkamal, ‘Embedded System – Architecture, Programming, Design’, Tata McGraw

Hill, 2011.

3. R.S. Gaonkar, ‘Microprocessor Architecture Programming and Application’, with

8085, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New Delhi, 2013.

4. Soumitra Kumar Mandal, Microprocessor and Microcontroller Architecture,

Programming & Interfacing using 8085,8086,8051, McGraw Hill Edu,2013.

5. Valder – Perez, “Microcontroller – Fundamentals and Applications with Pic,” Yees dee

Publishers, Taylor & Francis, 2013.

WEB RESOURCES:



180

ME 18026 OPERATIONS RESEARCH L T P C

(COMMON TO ME, AE & CH) 3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To provide knowledge and training in using optimization techniques under limited

resources for the engineering and business problems.

To apply the concept of inventory and project management.

To judge the suitable decision models and queuing theory for Industrial problems.

UNIT I LINEAR MODELS 10

Phases of OR – Linear programming Formulation- Graphical Solution and Simplex Method –

IPPs - Definition – Types Formulation – Branch and Bound Technique (2 – Variable problems

only)

UNIT II TRANSPORTATION AND SEQUENCING MODELS 9

Transpo Transportation model – Initial solution by North West corner method – Least Cost method –

VAM. Optimality test – MODI method. Assignment model – formulation – Balanced and

unbalanced assignment problems. Sequencing – Problem with N jobs and 2 machines - 3

machines and ‘M’ machines.

UNIT III PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND INVENTORY 8

CPM and PERT networks – Critical path scheduling – Inventory models – Economic order

quantity models – Quantity discount models – Stochastic inventory models – Multi product

models – Inventory control models in practice.

UNIT IV QUEUING THEORY AND NON-LINEAR MODEL 9

Queuing models - Queuing systems and structures – Notation parameter – Single server and

multi-server models – Poisson input – Exponential service – Constant rate service – Infinite

population – Simulation Introduction - Lagrangian Method - Kuhn-Tucker conditions.

UNIT V DECISION MODELS 9

Decision models – Game theory – Two-person zero sum games – Graphical solution- Algebraic

solution– Linear Programming solution. Replacement models – Items that deteriorate with time -

When money value changes – Items that fail completely – Individual replacement and Group

replacement.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will identify, develop and evaluate linear programming models to achieve

best solution from the verbal descriptions.

2. Will analyze and evaluate the various methods under transportation, assignment and

sequencing models.

3. The students will select suitable decision for Project management and Inventory

Problems.

4. Will apply appropriate queuing theories in domain specific situations.

5. The students will decide suitable decision models for industry-oriented problems.

181

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Panneerselvan. R., “Operation Research”, Prentice Hall of India Pvt Ltd, 2016

2. Taha H.A., “Operations Research”, Tenth Edition, Prentice Hall of India, 2016

REFERENCES :

1. Rama Murthy R, “Operations Research”,Second edition, New Age International Publisher,

2007

2. Hira and Gupta “Problems in Operations Research”, S.Chand and Co.2008

3. Wagner, “Operations Research”, Prentice Hall of India, 2000.

WEB RESOURCES:



182

ME 18028 NANOMATERIALS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To learn the fundamentals of nanoscience, units, scaling, bonds, interactions, structure size

and dependence

To learn about various methods of nanomaterial processing

To learn the various techniques available to characterize nanomaterials

To understand the various applications of nanomaterials

UNIT I FUNDAMENTALS OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Introduction, Scientific revolution historical development of nanomaterials, Classification,

Definition of nano system – bottom up and top down approaches; Units, Scaling, Atoms,

Molecules, Clusters and Supramolecules. Structure and Bonding – Chemical bonds,

Intermolecular forces, Special interactions, Hydrogen bonding, Hydrophobic and Hydrophilic

interactions.

UNIT II STRUCTURE, PROPERTIES AND SIZE DEPENDENCE 9

Molecular and crystalline structures, Hierarchical structures, Bulk to surface transition, Surface

reconstruction, Properties – chemical, optical, vibrational, thermal mechanical, Density function

theory.

UNIT III NANO MATERIAL PROCESSING 9

Chemical methods - Electrochemical methods, Vapour growth; Thin film methods – CVD &

PVD, sputtering, laser ablation; Mechanical methods – ball milling, mechanical attrition; Sol-gel

methods, bio-inspired processing

UNIT IV CHARACTERIZATION OF NANOMATERIALS 9

Need for characterization, SEM, TEM, Scanning Probe Microscopy – Atomic force, Scanning

tunneling methods; Diffraction and scattering techniques, Vibrational spectroscopy, Surface

techniques.

UNIT V NANOMATERIALS APPLICATION 9

Nano-electronics, Nano optics, Nano sensors, Nano bio medical applications, Photovoltaic cells,

fuel cells, batteries and energy related applications, Nano composites for engineering

applications, nanolithography.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

At the end of the course, the student will obtain the knowledge of

1. Nanomaterials, its evolution and structure

2. Various properties and size dependency in nanomaterials

3. Various nanomaterials processing techniques

4. Different characterizations methods available

5. Applications of nanomaterials in various fields

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Frank J. Owens and Charles P. Poole Jr., “The Physics and Chemistry of NanoSolids”,

183

Wiley-Inderscience, 2008.

2. A.S. Edelstein and R.C. Cammarata, “Nanomaterials-Synthesis, Properties and

Applications”, Institute of Physics Publishing, London, 1998.

REFERENCES :

1. G. Ozin and A.Arsenault, “Nanochemistry: A Chemical Approach to Nanomaterials, “,

RSC Publishing, 2005.

2. Edward L. Wolf, “Nanophysics and Nanotechnology: An Introduction to Modern

Concepts in Nanoscience”, Wiley-VCH, 2005.

WEB RESROURCES:



184

ME18030 PRODUCT DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To study the basic concepts of product design and development process.

To develop different models and designs of products as per customer needs.

To enable the students to create products with desired qualities and characteristics.

UNIT I PRODUCT PLANNING 9

Product Planning Process- Identify Opportunities- Evaluating and Prioritizing Projects-

Allocating Resources and Timing- Pre-Project Planning-Reflect on the Results and the Process-

Identifying Customer Needs- Raw Data from Customers-Interpreting Raw Data in Terms of

Customer Needs-Organizing the Needs into a Hierarchy- Establishing the Relative Importance of

the Needs-Case study.

UNIT II PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 9

Specifications Established- Establishing Target Specifications–QFD-Setting the Final

Specifications-Concept Generation-The Activity of Concept Generation- Clarify the Problem-

Search Externally-Search Internally-Explore Systematically- Case study.

UNIT III CONCEPT SELECTION 9

Concept Selection-Overview of Methodology- The Decision matrix – Pugh’s method - Concept

Screening-Concept Testing-Define the Purpose of the Concept Test- Choose a Survey

Population-Choose a Survey Format- Communicate the Concept- Measure Customer Response-

Interpret the Results- Concept Testing Methodologies- Case study.

UNIT IV PRODUCT ARCHITECTURE 9

Product development management - establishing the architecture - creation - clustering - geometric layout

development - Fundamental and incidental interactions - related system level design issues - secondary

systems -architecture of the chunks - creating detailed interface specifications-Portfolio Architecture.

UNIT V DESIGN FOR MANUFACTURING, ASSEMBLY AND ENVIRONMENT 9

Factors influencing process selection- fabrication guidelines- design for manufacturing- design

for assembly- Reliability and failure- risk assessment- preliminary hazard analysis- failure

modes- effects analysis- Estimation of Manufacturing cost-reducing the component costs and

assembly costs.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will explain the concept of product design and its applications.

2. The students will be skillful to classify the product planning process based on the

customer need.

3. The students will recommend the best concept based on concept evaluation process

4. The students will establish the final specification of the product with cost, aesthetic and

ergonomics aspects.

5. The students will be mastered to implement the suitable product architecture.

185

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Ulrich, Karl T. and Steven D. Eppinger, ‘”Product Design and Development”,

Irwin/McGraw-Hill, 6th Edition, 2015.

REFERENCES :

1. David G.Ullman, “The Mechanical Design Process”, Tata McGraw Hill , 2015.

2. Kevin Otto, and Kristin Wood, “Product Design – Techniques in Reverse Engineering

and New Product Development”, Pearson Education, First edition,2000, ISBN 81- 7758-

821-4.

3. Orwin, Homewood, “Effective Product Design and Development”, Stephen Rosenthal,

Business One 1992,ISBN, 1-55623-603-4

4. Stuart Pugh, “Tool Design – Integrated Methods for successful Product Engineering”,

Addison Wesley Publishing, Newyork, NY, 1991, ISBN 0-202-41639-5.

WEB RESOURCES:




186

ME 18032 SENSORS FOR AUTOMATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To learn the various types of sensors, transducers and signal conditioning circuits

essential for industrial automation

To explore the different industrial applications of smart sensors

To describe the recent advances in sensor technology

To impart knowledge on chemical and radiation sensors


Definition, Measurement Techniques, Classification of errors, Error analysis, Static and dynamic

characteristics of transducers, Performance measures of sensors, Classification of sensors,

calibration techniques.

UNIT II RESISTANCE, INDUCTANCE AND CAPACITANCE

TRANSDUCERS

9

Potentiometer, strain gauges, optical encoders, LVDT, RVDT, Synchro, Microsyn, Applications:

Pressure, position, angle and acceleration. Capacitance circuitry, Feedback type condenser

microphone , frequency modulating oscillator circuit, Dynamic capacitance variation, A.C.

Bridge for Amplitude Modulation, Applications: Proximity, microphone, pressure, displacement

UNIT III PIEZOELECTRIC & MAGNETIC SENSORS 9

Piezoelectric Materials and properties, Modes of deformation, Multimorphs, Environmental

effects, Applications: Accelerometer, ultrasonic. Magnetic Sensors, types, principle, requirement

and advantages: Magneto resistive, Hall Effect – Eddy current.

UNIT IV RADIATION AND ELECTRO CHEMICAL SENSORS 9

Photo conductive cell, photo voltaic, Photo resistive, Fiber optic sensors, Ray and Nuclear

radiation sensors, Electro chemical sensors: Electro chemical cell, Polarization, sensor

Electrodes and Electro-ceramics in Gas Media

UNIT V MODERN SENSORS AND CASE STUDIES 9

Film sensors, micro-scale sensors, Particle measuring systems, Vibration Sensors, SMART

sensors, Machine Vision, Multi-sensor systems

Case studies of Sensors in Automobile Engineering, Aeronautics, Machine tools and

Manufacturing processes.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will know the principles of motion, proximity and ranging, sensors and able

to study the characteristics of it.

2. The students will know the principles of force, magnetic and heading sensors and able to

study the characteristics of it.

3. The students will know the principles of optical, pressure and temperature sensors and

able to study the characteristics of it.

4. The students will know the principles of signal conditioning and transducers

187

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Renganathan S.,” Transducer Engineering”, Allied Publishers (P) Ltd., 2003.

REFERENCES :

1. Bolton W, “Mechatronics”, Thomson Press, 2019.

2. Bradley D.A., and Dawson, Burd and Loader, “Mechatronics”, Thomson Press India

Ltd”, 2004.

3. Ernest O. Doebelin, “Measurement systems Application and Design”, International

Student Edition, VII Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Company, 2019.

4. Ghosh A K, “Introduction to Measurements and Instrumentation”, Fourth Edition, PHI

Learning, 2012

5. Patranabis D., “Sensor and Actuators”, Prentice Hall of India (Pvt) Ltd., 2005.

WEB RESOURCES:


188

ME18034 THERMAL TURBO MACHINES L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To teach the various system, principles, operations and applications of different types of

turbo machinery component.

To understand the design parameters and flow analysis of centrifugal fans and blowers

To analyze the performance of centrifugal compressors and axial flow compressors

To be familiar with the performance of axial and radial flow turbines

UNIT I PRINCIPLES 9

Energy transfer between fluid and rotor- Classification of fluid machinery, dimensionless

parameters- specified speed – applications- stage velocity triangles- work and efficiency

UNIT II CENTRIFUGAL FANS AND BLOWERS 9

Types- stage and design parameters-flow analysis in impeller blades-volute and diffusers, losses,

characteristic curves and selection, fan drives and fan noise

UNIT III CENTRIFUGAL COMPRESSORS 9

Construction details, impeller flow losses, slip factor, diffuser analysis, losses and performance

curves

UNIT IV AXIAL FLOW COMPRESSORS 9

Stage velocity diagrams, enthalpy-entropy diagrams, stage losses and deficiency, work done

simple design problems and performance characteristics

UNIT V AXIAL AND RADIAL FLOW TURBINES 9

Stage velocity diagrams, reaction stages, losses and coefficients, blade design principles, testing and

performance characteristics.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

1. Student will be able to describe the basic principles applied in fluid machinery.

2. Students can analyze the centrifugal fans, blowers and compressors.

3. Students will be able to analyze the performance of Centrifugal Compressors.

4. Students can perform analysis on the performance of axial flow compressors.

5. Students can evaluate the analytical problems on axial and radial flow turbines.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Dixon S.L, “Fluid Mechanics & Thermodynamics of Turbo machines”, Elsevier (2005).

2. Kadambi. V and Manohar Prasad, “An Introduction to Energy Conversion”, Volume III

Turbo machinery, New International Publishes reprint (2008).

3. Yahya S.M “Turbines, Compressors & Fans”, Tata-McGraw Hill Co., 4TH

Edition.(2010).

REFERENCES:

1. Bruneck, “Fans”, Pergamons Press, 1973.

2. Gopalakrishnan G and PriviRaj D,”A Treatise on Turbomachines”,,Scitec Publications

(India) Pvt.Ltd.2002

189

3. Ganesan.V.”Gas turbines”, Tata Mc-Graw Hill Pub Co.,1999

4. Shepherd.D.G, “Principles of Turbomachinery”, Macmillan, 1969.

WEB RESOURCES:


190

GE 18052 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To facilitate the understanding of Quality Management principles and processes.

To learn TQM & process monitoring techniques

To know about various quality management system implemented in industries


Fundamentals of TQM – Historical developments – important philosophies- (Deming, Juran,

Crossby, Ishikawa) and their impact of quality – Quality planning, Quality statement – Quality

policy.

UNIT II TQM PRINCIPLES 9

Customer focus - Customer satisfaction – customer perception of quality, customer complaints,

Employee involvement – Empowerment and Team work- Recognition and Reward –

Performance appraisal - Supplier Quality Management – Supplier Rating – Supplier rating by

Analytical Hierarchical Process (AHP)

UNIT III PROCESS MONITORING 9

Seven tools of quality, New Seven management tools, Statistical fundamentals – Normal curve

charts for variables and attributes, TPM – Concepts, Process Capability analysis , PDSA cycle,

5S, Kaizen.

UNIT IV TQM TECHNIQUES 10

Quality Functions Deployment (QFD) – house of Quality, QFD process and benefits,

Benchmarking process, Taguchi Quality Loss function, FMEA – concept, Industrial case

studies on DFMEA and PFMEA – Six Sigma –concepts- Methodologies

UNIT V QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 9

Need for ISO – ISO 9001: 2015 – Elements, Implementation, Documentation and Auditing, QS

9000 / TS 16949 - ISO14000 and OSHAS 18000 – Concept requirements and benefits – Case

studies.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

At the end of the course, the students will

1. able to describe the evolution and concepts of quality and Total Quality Management.

2. discuss the principles of TQM.

3. illustrate process monitoring tools and relate with industrial examples.

4. apply the various techniques of TQM in industries.

5. explain the need for Quality Management systems in industries

191

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Dale H. Besterfiled, et at., "Total quality Management", Third Edition, Pearson

Education Asia, Indian Reprint, 2006.

2. Poornima M. Charantimath, Total Quality Management, Pearson education, 3rd edition,

2017

REFERENCES :

1. James R. Evans and William M. Lindsay, "The Management and Control of Quality", 8th

Edition, First Indian Edition, Cengage Learning, 2012.

2. Janakiraman. B and Gopal .R.K., "Total Quality Management - Text and Cases", Prentice

Hall (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2006.

3. Shridhara Bhat, “TQM Text and Cases”, Himalaya Publishing House, 2002.

4. Suganthi.L and Anand Samuel, "Total Quality Management", Prentice Hall (India) Pvt.

Ltd., 2006.

WEB RESOURCES:



192

OPEN ELECTIVE – I

(Offered by Mechanical Engineering Department during Odd Semester)

OE18001 BASICS OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To impart knowledge of general principles of Mechanical Engineering.

To enable the students to distinguish the components and working principle of Power

plants, IC engines and Refrigeration system.

To explain the basic materials and various manufacturing Processes.

To understand the fundamentals of fluid power system.

UNIT I POWER PLANTS 9 Renewable and Non-Renewable sources of energy, Working principle of power plants – Steam,

Nuclear and Hydro-Electric. High pressure boilers, Turbines – Reaction and Impulse turbines,

Reciprocating Pumps – single acting and double acting, Centrifugal Pumps.

UNIT II REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING 7

Refrigeration – Application of refrigeration, Vapour compression refrigeration system, Vapour

absorption refrigeration system, Construction and working principle of domestic refrigerators.

Air conditioning principles and system – Scope of air conditioning – Psychometric properties of

air – Human comforts and its standards, Working principle of window and split type air

conditioner.

UNIT III INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES 10 Otto cycle – Diesel cycle – Working principle of 2-stroke and 4-stroke engine, Introduction to

automobiles – Types and layout of automobiles – Major components and its functions,

Fundamentals of aerodynamic: Theory of lift and drag, Principle of rocket propulsion, Aircraft

engine and its types. Hybrid Electric vehicle.

UNIT IV MATERIALS, MACHINE TOOL AND MANUFACTURING

PROCESSES

10

Engineering materials: Classification – Properties – Alloys and their application.

Working principle and types of operations – Lathe, Drilling, Grinding and Milling machines.

Introduction to NC and CNC machines.

Metal forming Process – Casting, Sheet metal forming, Sheet metal cutting, Forging, Rolling,

Extrusion, Metal joining process – Soldiering, Brazing, and Welding. UNIT V FLUID POWER SYSTEM 9

Hydraulic system: Pump classifications, Cylinders - Types and construction, Control values –

Flow, Direction and Pressure. Pneumatic system: Compressor - Filter, Regulator, Lubricator

and Air control valves. Introduction to PLC and its application.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will be able to acquire the knowledge on various power plants and their

main components.

2. The students will interpret the working principles internal combustion engines

3. The students will have exposure to domestic refrigerator and air conditioners

4. The students will understand about materials and their manufacturing processes.

5. The students will learn about the Fluid power system concepts and its components

193

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Shanmugam G and Palanichamy M.S, "Basic Civil and Mechanical Engineering", Tata

McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2018.

2. Kumar, T., Leenus Jesu Martin and Murali, G., “Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Suma


3. Prabhu, T. J., Jai Ganesh, V. and Jebaraj, S., “Basic Mechanical Engineering”, Scitech


REFERENCES :

1. Nag P.K, "Power Plant Engineering", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co., New Delhi,

2014.

2. Ganesan V, "Internal Combustion Engines", 4th edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing

Co., New Delhi, 2012.

3. Arora C.P, "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co,

New Delhi, 2009.

4. Anthony Esposito,” Fluid Power with Applications”, PHI / Pearson Education, 2005

5. Hajra Chouldhary S.K and Hajra Choudhury. AK. "Elements of workshop

Technology", volume I and II, Media promoters and Publishers Private Limited, Mumbai,

16th edition, 2015.

6. Kalpakjian. S, “Manufacturing Engineering and Technology”, Pearson Education India

7th Edition, 2014.

7. R. Srinivasan, "Engineering Materials and Metallurgy", McGraw Hill Education, 2009

194

OE18003 ELEMENTS OF MECHANICAL COMPONENTS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES: 1. To understand the basic concepts of machine components in mechanical systems.

2. To familiarize with various steps involved in the Design Process.

3. To impart knowledge on the principles, design and operation of hydraulic and pneumatic

components in mechanical systems

4. To impart knowledge about the elements and its working principles involved in

Mechatronics systems.

UNIT I MECHANICAL COMPONENTS 9

Introduction to various mechanical components, selection of materials – Mechanical

Characteristics of Materials -design creteria-Factor of safety-Theory of Failure . Couplings,

shafts, spring.

UNIT II TRANSMISSION COMPONENTS 9

Design of Flat belt drive - V-belt drive – chain drive-Gears-Types-terminology- Speed ratios -

number of teeth - Gear materials - Spur Gears –Gear train.

UNIT III HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS 9

Sources of Hydraulic power: Pumping Theory – Pump Classification- pumps, Hydraulic

Actuators: Cylinders – Types and construction, Hydraulic motors Control Components, Pressure

control valves- Types, Construction and Operation- Applications.

UNIT IV PNEUMATIC COMPONENTS 9

Importance of Pneumatic system, Compressors- Filter, Regulator, Lubricator, Muffler, Air

control Valves, Quick Exhaust valves, Pneumatic actuators, Servo systems.

UNIT V MAHINE TOOLS 9

Machine tool -lathe, milling machine, drilling machine Components – linear and reciprocation

motion generation- components.

TOTAL:45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

1. Students will be able to select the various mechanical components for different

application.

2. Students will be able to identify the mechanical components for various transmission

systems.

3. Students can apply the concept of constructing the hydraulic models for motors and

control valves.

4. Students can apply the concept of designing the models for compressors and control

valves.

5. Students can apply the knowledge to select the various manufacturing process

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Anthony Esposito, “Fluid Power with Applications”, PHI / Pearson Education, 2005.

2. Bhandari V, “Design of Machine Elements”, 4th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Book Co,

2016.

3. Bolton, “Mechatronics”, Prentice Hall, 2014

195

4. Joseph Shigley, Charles Mischke, Richard Budynas and Keith Nisbett “Mechanical

Engineering Design”, 9th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2011.

REFERENCES :

1. Michael B. Histand and Davis G.Alciatore, “Introduction to Mechatronics and

Measurement systems”, McGraw Hill International 3rd edition, 2007.

2. Robert C. Juvinall and Kurt M. Marshek, “Fundamentals of Machine Component Design,

Wiley, 2013

3. Sundararajamoorthy T. V. Shanmugam .N, “Machine Design”, Anuradha Publication,

Chennai, 2003.

4. Sen G C and A. Bhattacharya.A, “Principles of Machine Tools”, New Central book

Agency, 2010.

5. Srinivasan. R, "Hydraulic and Pneumatic Control", IInd Edition, Tata McGraw – Hill

Education, 2012.

WEB RESOURCE:



196

OE18005 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To know the basics Concepts of Industrial Engineering

To understand about Work Study, Method Study and Time Study.

To understand the concept of Motion Study.

To recognize the need for Ergonomics and Ergonomics Model.

UNIT I INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING & PRODUCTIVITY 9

Meaning, Definition, Objective, Need, Scope, Evolution and developments. Definition of

productivity, individual enterprises, management productivity of materials, land, building, machine

and power. Measurement of productivity, factors affecting the productivity, productivity

improvement programs, wages and incentives (simple numerical problems).

UNIT II WORK STUDY, METHOD STUDY & MICRO AND MEMO MOTION

STUDY

10

Definition, objective and scope of work study. Human factors in work study. Work study and

management, work study and supervision, work study and worker. Method study – Definition,

objective & scope, activity recording and exam aids. Charts to record moments in shop operation –

process charts, flow process charts, travel chart and multiple activity charts. (With simple

problems). Charts to record moment at work place – principles of motion economy, classification of

moments two handed process chart, SIMO chart, and micro motion study. Development, definition

and installation of the improved method, brief concept about synthetic motion studies.

UNIT III WORK MEASUREMENT & TIME STUDY 9

Definition, objective and benefit of work measurement. Work measurement techniques. Work

sampling: need, confidence levels, sample size determinations, random observation, conducting

study with the simple problems. Time Study, Definition, time study equipment, selection of job,

steps in time study. Breaking jobs into elements, recording information. Rating & standard Rating,

standard performance, scale of rating, factors of affecting rate of working, allowances and standard

time determination. Predetermined motion time study – Method time measurement (MTM)

UNIT IV ERGONOMICS & DESIGN OF MAN-MACHINE SYSTEM 10

Introduction, areas of study under ergonomics, system approach to ergonomics model, man-machine

system. Components of man-machine system and their functions – work capabilities of industrial

worker, study of development of stress in human body and their consequences. Fatigue in industrial

workers, Quantitative qualitative representation and alphanumeric displays, Controls and their

design criteria, control types, relation between controls and displays, layouts of panels and

machines. Design of work places, influence of climate on human efficiency. Influence of noise,

vibration and light

UNIT V CURRENT TRENDS 07

Introduction to Agile manufacturing, Lean and Six Sigma, Value Engineering, Just in time, Total

quality management, Enterprise resource planning, Supply chain and logistics management.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

197

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will be able to distinguish the basics of Industrial engineering concepts.

2. Students will be able to apply work study and method study in Industrial case studies

3. Will be able to demonstrate the work sampling method and time study in a manufacturing

process

4. Will be able to construct ergonomical models for industrial application.

5. Students will be able to examine the industrial process by applying different techniques.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. George Kanawaty, “Introduction to Work Study”, IV Revised Edition,1992.

2. Khanna.O.P, “Industrial Engineering and Management”, DhanpatRai Publications Pvt Ltd,

2010

3. Marvin E. Mundel and David L.Danner,Motion and Time study Improving

Productivity,Prentice Hall India,7 th Edition,1994.

4. Ralph M Barnes,“Motion and Time Study Design and Measurement of Work, 7ed (WSE)

Paperback,2009.

5. “Engineered work Measurement” - Weldon, ELBS,1991

REFERENCES:

1.Bridger RS. Introduction to Ergonomics. 3 rd CRC Press, Boca Raton, Fl, USA,2009.

2. Khan, M.I, “Industrial Engineering”, New Age International, 2nd Edition, 2009

3. Sanders. S and E J McCormick, Human Factors in Engineering Design”,McGraw Hill ,New

york ,7 th Edition,1993.

WEB RESOURCE:



198

OE 18007 BASICS OF ENERGY RESOURCES L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To get exposed to various sources of energy and the environmental impact of them.

To acquire knowledge about various conversion techniques for effective utilization of

renewable energy resources.

To gain knowledge about various storage devices for energy storage.

To assess the life cycle and conduct primary and net energy analysis

UNIT I ENERGY RESOURCES 9

Energy generation in coal based, nuclear based, diesel and gas based power plants, world energy

flows, energy and economic growth, supply and availability; Electric utilities and regulations,

cost structure analysis, economics of energy use in agriculture, transport, building, Industry and

energy substitution, cost benefit analysis –carbon credit and footprint.

UNIT II ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS OF ENERGY USE 8

Global warming -sources of emissions, CO2emissions, impacts, mitigation and sustainability.

environmental standards, legislation and audits, air pollution -SOx, NOx, CO, particulates, solid

and water pollution, formation of pollutants, measurement and controls.

UNIT III RENEWABLE ENERGY 10

Solar PV cell; Wind energy-HAWT; Biomass energy-Bio-digesters, Bio-diesel; OTEC.

UNIT IV ENERGY STORAGE 9

Potential energy, Pumped hydro storage; KE and Compressed gas system: Flywheel storage,

compressed air energy storage; Electrical and magnetic energy storage: Capacitors,

electromagnets; Chemical Energy storage: Thermo-chemical, photo-chemical, bio-chemical,

Superconducting Magnet Energy Storage (SMES) systems.

UNIT V ENERGY ECONOMICS 9

Simple payback period, time value of money, IRR, NPV, life cycle costing, cost of saved energy,

and cost of energy generated, examples from energy generation and conservation, energy chain,

primary energy analysis, life cycle assessment, net energy analysis, case studies on life cycle

costing

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

Students will

1. get an exposure about the various traditional sources of energy.

2. learn about the environmental impact associated with usage of traditional energy sources.

3. acquire knowledge about the various techniques used in effective conversion of

renewable sources of energy for our use.

4. gain knowledge about storage of energy in various forms.

5. conduct analysis on primary and net energy and be able to estimate costs related to

energy consumption and conservation.

199

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Energy and the Challenge of Sustainability, World energy assessment, UNDP New York,

2004.

2. AKN Reddy, RH Williams, TB Johansson, Energy after Rio, Prospects and challenges,

UNDP, United Nations Publications, New York, 1997.

REFERENCES :

1. Nebojsa Nakicenovic, Arnulf Grubler and Alan McDonald “Global energy perspectives”,

Cambridge University Press, 1999.

2. Fowler, J.M ., “Energy and the environment”, McGraw Hill,1984.5.Robert Ristirer, and

Jack P. Kraushaar., “Energy and the environment”,Willey,2005

3. Yves Brunet., “Energy storage”, Wiley publications, 2013.

4. Rai, G.D., "Non-conventional Energy Sources", Khanna Publishers, 2002.

WEB RESOURCES:



200

OPEN ELECTIVE – II

(Offered by Mechanical Engineering Department during Even Semester)

OE 18002 ELEMENTS OF AUTOMATION L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To make the students understand the fundamentals and elements of automation system.

Students should be able to determine the hardware and software requirements

They should further understand how to design automation systems for different applications.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO AUTOMATION 7

Basic elements of automation system – Advanced Automation Functions - Levels of automation

– Industrial control systems - Continuous and Discrete control systems – Computer process

control.

UNIT II HARDWARE COMPONENTS FOR AUTOMATION 10

Sensors – Accelerometer, Dynamometer, Fluid flow sensor, Limit switch, Linear encoder,

LVDT, Piezoelectric transducer – Proximity sensor, Strain gage, Temperature sensors –

Thermistor, Thermocouple.

Actuators – Types – Electric motors – Rotary & Linear motors – Hydraulic and Pneumatic

actuators – Analog-to-Digital converters – Digital-to-Analog converters, Input/output devices for

automation.

UNIT III COMPUTER NUMERICAL CONTROL AND ROBOTICS 10

Fundamentals of NC technology; Computer Numerical Control (CNC); Direct Numerical

Control (DNC); NC part programming; Applications of Numerical Control.

Robot anatomy; robot classification; End effectors; Sensors in robotics; Introduction to robot

programming; Industrial applications of robot.

UNIT IV MATERIAL HANDLING AND FMS SYSTEMS 10

Introduction to material handling equipment; principle of material handling; automated guided

vehicle systems (AGV); rail guided vehicles; conveyor systems; Automatic Data Capture (ADC)

– bar code technology, RFID, magnetic stripes, optical character recognition (OCR).

Cellular manufacturing; Components of Flexible Manufacturing Systems; applications and

benefits of FMS.

UNIT V AUTOMATED MANUFACTURING SYSTEMS 8

Automated production lines; applications of automated production lines. Fundamentals of

automated assembly systems; design for automated assembly. Lean production; Agile

manufacturing.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will be able to define automation, it’s importance, expectations from

automation and applications in industry.

2. Students can able to identify the hardware and software requirements of process

automation.

3. Students will be able to understand the basics of CNC technology; they will be able to

select the correct type of robot and end effectors for their application.

201

4. Students will be able to choose appropriate material handling system and automatic data

capture system.

5. Students will understand the basics of automated production lines; they will be able to

implement lean and agile manufacturing.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Mikell P. Groover, “Automation, Production Systems, and Computer-Integrated

Manufacturing”, Pearson, 5th Edition, 2015.

REFERENCES :

1. Springer, “Handbook of Automation”, 2009.

2. Richard L. Shell & Ernest L. Hall, “Handbook of Industrial Automation”, Marcel

Dekker,Inc., 2000.

202

OE 18004 QUALITY CONCEPTS AND TOOLS L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To introduce basic quality concepts and tools to the students by making them study the

importance of various tools and techniques through industry examples and case studies.

To learn quality planning tools and its application in industries.

To study lean management concepts and techniques

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO QUALITY 9

Introduction to quality – Perception of Quality – Quality Concept, Different Definitions and

Dimensions, Quality Control, Quality Assurance and Quality Management, Quality as Wining

Strategy - Statistical Process Control (SPC) - Strategic Management -Quality Management,

Ethics and Corporate Social Responsibility.

UNIT II QUALITY TOOLS 9

Flow Charts – Histogram – Checksheet – Cause and Effect diagram – Run charts & Control

charts – Pareto charts – Scatter diagram –Spot charts – Pie charts

UNIT III NEW MANAGEMENT & PLANNING TOOLS 9

Affinity diagram – Interrelationship diagram – Tree diagram –Matrix diagram- Prioritization

matrix – Process decision program chart – Activity network diagram

UNIT IV QUALITY MANAGEMENT TECHNIQUES 10

Quality Function Deployment (QFD) - FMEA – Stages and types - PDCA/ PDSA – Deisgn of

Experiments (DOE) - Six sigma – DMAIC – DMADV – Case studies in manufacturing and

service industries.

UNIT V LEAN MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS & TOOLS 8

Lean – definition – wastes - Value Stream Mapping (VSM) – Kanban system – Kaizen -Takt

Time -5S- Poka Yoke – One piece flow – Jidoka – Heijunka – Hoshin Kanri – Gemba –

Bottleneck and JIT.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

The students will

1. explain the basics of quality concepts and its importance.

2. Be able to interpret the traditional tools of quality

3. will apply the new management and planning tools which are currently used in industries.

4. illustrate how quality management techniques help industries by emphasizing their

applications with case studies.

5. describe lean concepts, lean tools and terminologies

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Peter Mears, “Quality Improvement tools and Techniques”, McGraw-Hill, 1995

REFERENCES :

1. Amitava Mithra, “Fundamentals of Quality control and Improvement”, Wiley, Third

Edition, 2008

203

2. Dale H.Besterfield, “Quality Control”, Pearson Education Asia, Eighth Edition, 2008.

3. James P. Womack and Daniel T. Jones, “Lean Thinking”, Simon & Schuster, 1996.

4. Jeffrey K. Liker, “The Toyota Way”, Tata McGraw Hill, 2004

5. Narayana and Sreenivasasn, “Quality Management- Concepts and tasks”, New Age

International, 1996.

WEB RESOURCES:



204

OE18006 REFRIGERATION AND AIRCONDITIONING L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES :

To impart the concept, laws and methodologies of refrigeration system

To apply the concepts and application of refrigeration systems

To apply the concepts and application of air conditioning systems

(Use of standard refrigerant property Databook and Psychrometric chart permitted)


Introduction to Refrigeration – Unit of Refrigeration and C.O.P.– Ideal cycles- Refrigerants

Desirable properties – Classification – Nomenclature – ODP & GWP.

UNIT II REFRIGERATION SYSTEM COMPONENTS 9

Compressors, condensers, expansion devises, evaporators its types construction and working,

comparison and selection, refrigeration piping accessories and controls, thermal insulation

properties and classification, thickness of insulation.

UNIT III PSYCHROMETRY AND PSYCHROMETRIC PROCESS 9

properties of air, Daltons law of partial pressure, humidity, temperature, enthalpy of moist air,

temperature and humidity measuring instruments, plotting psychrometric chart, psychrometric

processes such as sensible heating, cooling, heating and humidification cooling and

dehumidification, chemical dehumidification, adiabatic saturation.

UNIT IV AIRCONDITIONING SYSTEM 9

Window and Split type room Air conditioner Processes, Types and Working Principles-Concepts

of RSHF, GSHF, ESHF-Cooling load estimation (Descriptive only).

UNIT V AIRCONDITIONING LOAD CALCULATIONS 9

Airconditioning system-Load calculations and applied psychometrics: Internal heat gains, system

heat gains, break up of ventilation load and effective sensible heat factor, Bypass factor, cooling

load estimate.

TOTAL : 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

The students will

1. explain the working principles of ideal cycle used in Refrigeration system.

2. interpret the working principles of various parts associated with Refrigeration.

3. be able to analyze and evaluate the different psychrometric processes.

4. compare the working principle of various components of Air conditioning.

5. evaluate and analyse the various analytical problems associated with Air conditioning

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Arora. C.P., “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Tata McGraw-Hill New Delhi, 1988

2. Arora S.C & Domkundwar S, “Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning” Dhanpat Rai

Publication, 2009

3. Desai P.S, “Modern Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, Khanna Publishers, 2004.

205

4. Manohar Prasad, "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", Wiley Eastern Ltd., 1983.

REFERENCES :

1. Ahmadul Ameen, "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd.

2010.

2. Jordon and Prister, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning”, Prentice Hall of India PVT

Ltd., NewDelhi, 2009.

3. Ramesh Arora ,” Refrigeration and Air-conditioning”, Prentice Hall of India, 2010.

4. Roy.J Dossat, “Principles of Refrigeration”, Pearson Education 2009.

5. Sapali S.N., "Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", PHI Learning Private Ltd, 2009.

6. W.F.Stocker W.F and J.W.Jones J.W, “Refrigeration and Air Conditioning", McGraw-

Hill, 2009.

7. S.S Thispee S.S,” Refrigeration and air-conditioning”, Jaico Publications, 2009.

WEB RESOURCES:


206

OE 18008 THERMAL MANAGEMENT OF ELECTRONIC

DEVICES

L T P C

3 0 0 3

OBJECTIVES:

To impart the knowledge of primary techniques for cooling electronics, heat-transfer

fundamentals, phase change, and heat transfer across solid interfaces.

To enable the students to understand heat-generation in electronic equipment.

To acquire the knowledge of thermal management equipment like heat sinks, interface

materials, heat spreaders including liquid and air cooling, phase change cooling,


Modes of heat transfer, Heat transfer coefficient. Newton’s law of cooling. Power transistors,

Power diodes, Central processing units (CPUs). Causes of heat generation in electronic systems,

Effects of excessive joint temperature, Need for cooling of electronic components.

UNIT II AIR COOLING 9

Trends in selection of cooling media and arrangements.

Application of extended surfaces: external fins, heat sinks, Trends in heat sink technology, forced

draught, fan sizing procedure and fan selection guidelines.

UNIT III LIQUID COOLING 9

Heat transfer compounds, Thermally conductive pastes, Epoxy resins, Liquid cooling of

electronic devices, Liquid coolants and alternative liquid coolants for high density electronics,

UNIT IV THERMAL COOLING 9

Heat pipes, Technical characteristics of heat pipes, Micro channel,and two-phase cooling,

Cooling methods with phase change: Evaporation and Condensation.

UNIT V THERMOELECTRIC COOLING 9

Thermoelectric cooling: Thermoelectric cooling principles, Applications in electronics systems,

Peltier effect of cooling and semiconductors, Cooling of automotive electronics, Specification of

power dissipation, Trends in thermal management.

TOTAL: 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

The students will

1. understand the necessity of cooling of electronic components and heat transfer methods.

2. Be familiar with selection of cooling media and air-cooling methods

3. Be aware of the methods and materials for liquid cooling.

4. Be familiar with phase change cooling and techniques.

5. describe about thermoelectric cooling principles and its applications in electronics

systems.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Younes Shabany, Heat Transfer: Thermal Management of Electronics, CRC Press; 2010.

REFERENCES:

1. Bejan A. and Kraus A. D., Heat Transfer Handbook, Wiley& Sons, Inc. 2003.

207

2. Ganesan, Sanka, and Pecht, Micheal, eds., Lead-free Electronics, John Wiley & Sons,

New Jersey, 2006.

3. Sergent, J., and Krum, A., Thermal Management Handbook for Electronic Assemblies,

McGraw-Hill, New York, 1998

4. Yarin,L.P, Mosyak. A and Hetsroni. G., Fluid Flow, Heat Transfer and Boiling in Micro-

Channels., Springer-Verlag Berlin Heidelberg ISBN 978-3-540-78754-9 and e-ISBN

978-3-540-78755-6., 2009.

5. Zumbrunnen D. A., Heat and Mass Transfer in Materials Processing and Manufacturing,

ASME, New Orleans, 1993.

WEB RESOURCES:

https://andhrauniversity.edu.in

https://nus.edu.sg

https://www. sjsu.edu.

208

Value Added Courses

( To be completed in between III semester to VI semester)

VD18001 Advanced Gear Manufacturing Concepts L T P C

1 0 2 2

OBJECTIVES :

To acquire knowledge about various types of Gears and its nomenclature.

Understand the types of profiles generated in gear manufacturing

To choose a particular type of machine for gear generating process

To teach the students about the different gear generation methods by hands –on-Practice

To define the fundamental principles, design of spur and helical gear

UNIT I INTRODUCTION ON SPUR AND HELICAL GEAR 8

Review on gear tooth nomenclature, law of gearing, interference and undercutting, contact ratio.

Gear tooth action, Gear tooth profiles –cycloidal and involutes profile, involutes profile

generation. Addendum modification factor, tipping and topping, backlash. Design and Various

manufacturing methods of straight tooth spur & helical gears.

UNIT II GEAR GENERATION MACHINE TOOLS 7

Simple Indexing, Compound Indexing, Differential indexing, Gear Shaping, Numerical problems

on gear milling, Gear Hobbing, Helical Gear cutting on milling machine.

UNIT III PRACTICE-SPUR AND HELICAL GEAR 15

Hands-on Practice :Gear Milling, Hobbing, Gear Shaping, Bevel Gear cutting, Worm wheel

cutting

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students can apply the fundamental concepts to design and manufacture of spur and

helical gears

2. Students can able to analyze the type and profile of the gear

3. Students can apply the knowledge to operate gear generating machines without any

assistance

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Gitin M .Maitra, “Hand book of gear design” 2nd edition

REFERENCES :

1. AGMA-2001-D04, fundamental rating factor and calculation methods for involute spur

and helical gear teeth, AGMA,2001.

2. ISO-6336-2 Calculation of load capacity of spur and helical gears-Part2

3. ISO-6336, calculation of load capacity of spur and helical gears

WEB RESOURCES

NPTEL Course-Spur and Helical gear cutting -



209

VD 18002 CONDITION MONITORING OF MACHINE TOOLS L T P C

2 0 0 2

OBJECTIVES:

Understanding condition monitoring and preventive maintenance of machines.

Apply the basic concepts learned to know how vibrations affects the performance of

machine tools.

To analyze tool wear and failure modes of machineries.

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO CONDITION MONITORING 6

Machinery Condition Monitoring - Present Status - Fault Prognosis - Future Needs - Principles of

Maintenance - Reactive Maintenance - Preventive Maintenance - Predictive Maintenance -

Enterprise Resource Planning - Bath Tub Curve - Failure Modes Effects and Criticality Analysis

(FMECA).

UNIT II VIBRATION BASED CONDITION MONITORING 6

Principles of Vibration Monitoring - Misalignment Detection - Eccentricity Detection - Cracked

Shaft Bowed and Bent Shaft - Unbalanced Shaft – Looseness – Rub - Bearing Defects - Gear

Fault - Faults in Fluid Machines.

UNIT III THERMOGRAPHY &WEAR DEBRIS ANALYSIS 6

Thermal Imaging Devices - Use of IR Camera - Industrial Applications of Thermography -

Applications of Thermography in Condition Monitoring - Mechanisms of Wear - Detection of

Wear Particles - Common Wear Materials - Oil Sampling Technique - Oil Analysis - Limits of

Oil Analysis

UNIT IV MACHINE TOOL CONDITION MONITORING 6

Tool Wear - Sensor Fusion in Tool Condition Monitoring - Sensors for Tool Condition

Monitoring - A Tool Condition Monitoring System - Other Manufacturing Operations.

UNIT V ENGINEERING FAILURE ANALYSIS 6

Overview of Failure Analysis - Failure Modes - Failure Analysis - Failure Analysis Sampling

Guide.

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

1. Students will be able to use different techniques to monitor the machine tools for

preventing the failures.

2. At the ends of this course, students can able to de demonstrate, how vibration will affect

the accuracy of machine tools.

3. Students will be able to select the suitable mechanism to prevent and rectify the tool

wear.

4. Learner will be able to demonstrate the sensors and signal condition monitoring methods

applicable to machine tools.

5. Students will be able to identify the tools for Analysis of a complex failures of machine

tools.

210

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Amiya Ranjan Mohanty, “Machinery Condition Monitoring: Principles and Practices”,

CRC Press, 2017.

REFERENCES:

1. Jyoti Kumar Sinha, “Industrial Approaches in Vibration-Based Condition Monitoring”,

1st edition, CRC Press,2020.

2. Singiresu S. Rao, “Mechanical Vibrations”, Pearson Education, 2011.

3. Manfred Weck, “Hand book of machine tools – Vol.3”, John Wiley &Sons, 1984.

WEB RESOURCES





211

VD 18003 DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF JIGS AND

FIXTURES L T P C

2 0 0 2

OBJECTIVES :

To justify the need for productive tools in manufacturing

To understand the design principles of jigs and fixtures

To design and develop a drill Jig for a given product.

To design and develop a Fixture for a given product

UNIT I BASICS OF JIGS AND FIXTURES, LOCATION AND

CLAMPING DEVICES

6

Introduction – Jigs and Fixtures –Difference between Jigs and Fixtures –Advantages of jigs and

Fixtures –Economy and cost - Elements of Jigs and Fixtures –Fool Proofing –Materials used in

Jigs and Fixtures -Degrees of Freedom –12 degrees of freedom –6point location principle –(or)

3-2-1 principle of location – Principles of location –location point –types of locators– pins and

studs –V block –cup and cone location points – adjustable locating points – special adjustable

stops – location from finished holes in the work –Diamond pin locator– Cam operated ‘V’

locator –Quick action ‘V ’ locator -Six point location of a three legged object – Location of a

cylinder on a v -block. Principles of clamping –types of clamping –lever clamp –hinged lamp –

two way clamp –swinging clamp – wedge clamp – eccentric clamping arrangement –quick

action clamp – Cam operated clamp –quarter turn screw –Toggle clamp –Pneumatic and

hydraulic clamps – Washers - ‘C’ washer – spherical and flat washers.

UNIT II BUSHINGS AND DRILL JIGS 12

Jig Bushing : Materials for jig bushing -press fit bushing –Fixed renewable bushing –slip

renewable bushing – liner bushing –screw bushing –miscellaneous type of drill bushings –

bushing specifications. Drill Jigs : Open drill jig plate drill jig –plate drill jig – template drill jig

– channel drill jig –turn over drill jig – angle plate drill jig –closed box drill jig – leaf drill jig –

post jig –indexing drill jig –universal drill jig -design of template and leaf jig. Design and

development of Drill Jigs for a Given product.

UNIT III FIXTURES 12

General principles of boring, lathe, milling and broaching fixtures- Grinding, planning and

shaping fixtures, assembly, Inspection and welding fixtures- Modular fixtures. Design and

development of fixtures for given component.

Total : 30 hours

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will understand the Principles and elements of Jigs and Fixtures.

2. The students will be able to select a proper locators and clamping devices for a given

productive tool

3. Given a product diagram, the students will design and develop a drill jig

4. Given a product diagram, the students will design and develop a fixture for various

212

machining operations

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Cyril Donaldson, George H Le Cain, V C Goold and Joyjeet Ghose, “Tool Design”, Tata

McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Fourth Edition, 2012.

2. Joshi, P.H., “Jigs & Fixtures”, Second Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill Publishing Company

Limited, New Delhi 2004

3. Venkataraman. K., “Design of Jigs Fixtures & Press Tools”, Tata McGraw Hill, New

Delhi, 2005

REFERENCES :

1. ASTME Fundamentals of Tool Design Prentice Hall of India.

2. Design Data Hand Book, PSG College of Technology, Coimbatore.

WEB RESOURCES

1. http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/mev303/CHAPT_INTRODUCTION_TO_JIG

S_AND%20FIXTURES.pdf



4. https://www.rajagiritech.ac.in/Home/mech/Course_Content/Semester%20IV/ME%20220

%20Manufacturing%20Technology/Module%204.pdf

5. http://www.ignou.ac.in/upload/jig.pdf

http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/mev303/CHAPT_INTRODUCTION_TO_JIGS_AND%20FIXTURES.pdf

http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/mev303/CHAPT_INTRODUCTION_TO_JIGS_AND%20FIXTURES.pdf



https://www.rajagiritech.ac.in/Home/mech/Course_Content/Semester%20IV/ME%20220%20Manufacturing%20Technology/Module%204.pdf

https://www.rajagiritech.ac.in/Home/mech/Course_Content/Semester%20IV/ME%20220%20Manufacturing%20Technology/Module%204.pdf

http://www.ignou.ac.in/upload/jig.pdf

213

VD 18004 DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT OF PRESS TOOLS L T P C

2 0 0 2

OBJECTIVES :

To understand the sheet metal forming operations

To develop a strip layout for a given product so as to utilize the material more economically

To design and develop a simple, progressive and compound dies for a given product.

To design and develop a forming die

UNIT I INTRODUCTION TO PRESS TERMINOLOGY 8

Press operations – cutting and forming operations. Elastic recovery or spring back in sheet metal

operations. Press tool components – Rating of a press, Press working terminology, working of a

cutting die. Types of dies – Simple die, Compound die, Combination dies, Progressive dies,

Transfer dies. Principle of Metal cutting, Cutting Force estimation, Methods of reducing the

cutting force, Minimum diameter of piercing, Shut height of a press and shut height of a die

UNIT II DESIGN OF CUTTING DIES 11

Types of blanking die – Drop-through die, Inverted type die. Strip layout. 14 steps involved in

design of a die- How to Lay Out a Scrap Strip, How to Design Die Blocks, How to Design

Blanking Punches, How to Design Piercing Punches, How to Design Punch Plates, How to

Design Pilots, How to Design Gages, How to Design Finger Stops, How to Design Automatic

Stops, How to Design Strippers, How to Apply Fasteners, How to Select a Die Set, Dimensions

and Notes, The Bill of Material

UNIT III DESIGN OF FORMING DIES 11

Difference between bending and drawing – Blank development for above operations – Types of

Bending dies – Press capacity – Spring back – knockouts – direct and indirect – pressure pads –

Ejectors – Variables affecting Metal flow in drawing operations – draw die inserts – draw beads-

ironing – Design and development of bending, forming, drawing, reverse redrawing and

combination dies – Blank development for axisymmetric, rectangular and elliptic parts – Single

and double action dies.

Total : 30 hours

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will understand the various sheet metal cutting and forming operations

2. The students will be able to calculate the cutting force required for cutting and forming

operations

3. Given a product diagram, the students will design and develop a cutting die

4. Given a product diagram, the students will design and develop a Forming die

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Cyril Donaldson, George H Le Cain, V C Goold and Joyjeet Ghose, “Tool Design”, Tata

McGraw Hill Education Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, Fourth Edition, 2012.

2. Joshi P.H “Press tools - Design and Construction”, wheels publishing, 1996

214

3. Paquin. J.R., Die design Fundamentals, Industrial Press, 2006

REFERENCES :

1. ASTME Fundamentals of Tool Design Prentice Hall of India.

2. Design Data Hand Book, PSG College of Technology, Coimbatore.

WEB RESOURCES

1. https://uni.edu/~rao/Mfg%20Tooling%20-10%20Prog%20Tools-2.pdf

2. http://ignou.ac.in/upload/bme059unit-3.pdf

3. http://staff.uny.ac.id/sites/default/files/pendidikan/aan-ardian-mpd/1g-handbook-die-design-

2nd-edition.pdf

4. http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/Tool_Engineering_and_Design/CHAPTER5.pdf

5. https://www.academia.edu/6009091/DIE_DESIGN_FUNDAMENTALS

https://uni.edu/~rao/Mfg%20Tooling%20-10%20Prog%20Tools-2.pdf

http://ignou.ac.in/upload/bme059unit-3.pdf

http://staff.uny.ac.id/sites/default/files/pendidikan/aan-ardian-mpd/1g-handbook-die-design-2nd-edition.pdf

http://staff.uny.ac.id/sites/default/files/pendidikan/aan-ardian-mpd/1g-handbook-die-design-2nd-edition.pdf

http://www.nitc.ac.in/dept/me/jagadeesha/Tool_Engineering_and_Design/CHAPTER5.pdf

https://www.academia.edu/6009091/DIE_DESIGN_FUNDAMENTALS

215

VD18005 ENGINE INSTRUMENTATION AND TESTING L T P C

2 0 0 2

OBJECTIVES:

To provide in depth knowledge of engine testing and evaluation techniques.

To understand the heat release from an IC engine and use of flow visualization

techniques

UNIT I ENGINE DYNAMOMETER AND TESTS EQUIPMENT 12

Engine dynamometers, data acquisition, fuel consumption meter, air fuel ratio measurement, oil

consumption measurement, temperature and pressure measurement, humidity measurement

UNIT II ADVANCED ENGINE TESTING 10

Use of special equipment, fuel injection pressure, Gas analyser, combustion pressure, needle lift,

heat balance, gas exchange process, Spray and combustion photography, swirl measurement, Gas

chromatography

UNIT III ADVANCED MEASUREMENTS 8

Interferometer, Laser Doppler Anemometer, Hot wire Anemometer, Particle Image Velocimetry.

Flame Ionisation Detector, Non-Dispersive Infrared Analyser,

TOTAL: 30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES:

Students will be

1. familiar with the process of engine testing and emission measurements.

2. get exposure on the applicability of data acquisition system.

3. able to apply advanced techniques for engine measurement and flow visualization

techniques in IC engines.

REFERENCES:

1. Ganesan. V, Internal Combustion Engines, Tata McGraw Hill Book Co, 2013.

2. Holman. J.P, Experimental Methods for Engineers, McGraw – Hill Inc., 2001.

3. Wolfgang Merzkirch, Flow Visualisation, 2nd Edition, Academic Press, 1987

4. William.H. Crouse, Automotive Engines, McGraw Hill Publishers, 1985.

5. Ellinger, H.E, Automotive Engines, Prentice Hall Publishers, 1992.

6. Obert.E.F., Internal Combustion Engine analysis and Practice, International Text Book

Co., Scranton, Pennsylvania,1988.

WEB RESOURCE:

nptel.ac.in/ courses/112104033/112107242

216

VD18006 GEOMETRICAL DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCE L T P C 2 0 0 2

OBJECTIVES :

To develop a thorough understanding and interpreting Engineering drawings of various

mechanical components and assemblies

To create the Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T) system of symbols, rules

and definitions used to define the geometry of mechanical parts.

To create the knowledge in different kind of tolerances and its symbols

UNIT I GEOMETRIC TOLERANCING SYMBOLS AND GENERAL RULES 5

Introduction - Dimensioning Symbols - Geometric Characteristics - Modifying Symbols - Basic

Rules.

UNIT II DATUMS 5

Introduction - Datum Identification - Three-Plane Concept - Flat-Customized Datum Reference

Frame - Datum Targets - Three-Plane Concept - Circular-Partial Datums - Datums of Size-

Pattern of Features.

UNIT III TOLERANCES OF LOCATION 10

Concentricity – Symmetry - Position Introduction - Position Theory - Position of Multiple

Cylindrical Features - Composite Positional Tolerancing - Two Single-Segment Feature Control

Frames - Multiple Patterns Located by Basic-Dimensions and Related to the Same Datums -

Patterns Positions From a Datum of Size Introduction - Zero Tolerancing - Projected Tolerance

Zone – Non cylindrical Features - Bidirectional Tolerancing - Coaxial Features.

UNIT IV FORM AND ORIENTATION 5

Tolerances of Form-Straightness – Flatness - Circularity- Cylindricity - Tolerances of

Orientation – Perpendicularity – Angularity - Parallelism.

UNIT V PROFILE AND RUNOUT TOLERANCES 5

Profile of a surface and line -Part Calculations - Circular and Total Runout - Runout

Calculations.

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. The students will achieve the knowledge in application of Geometric Tolerancing and

Dimensioning standards and its principles.

2. The students will be able to identify datum features and determine their order of

precedence

3. The students will apply suitable documentation procedures with Geometric Tolerancing

and Dimensioning.

4. The students will read and interpret the production drawings used in industrial applications.

5. The students will perform design calculations associated with Geometric Tolerancing and

Dimensioning.

217

TEXT BOOKS:

1. Alex Krulikowski, “Fundamentals of Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing”, Delmar

Publishers, Second Edition, 2012.

2. P.S. Gill “Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing”, S.K. Kataria and Sons; 2013.

REFERENCES :

1. Daniel E. Puncochar, “Interpretation of Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing”,

Industrial Press, New York, Third Edition, 2010.

WEB RESOURCE:

https://nptel.ac.in/content/storage2/nptel_data3/html/mhrd/ict/text/112106179/lec1-14

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=P.S.+Gill&search-alias=stripbooks

218

VD18007 KAIZEN AND IT APPLICATIONS L T P C 2 0 0 2

OBJECTIVES :

To provide an overview of Kaizen

To provide an overall knowledge on Implementing of Kaizen.

To provide knowledge on Kaizen Tools

UNIT I HISTORY & INTRODUCTION TO KAIZEN 6

What is kaizen; why kaizen; History of Kaizen – Definition of Kaizen, philosophy; Objective of

Kaizen/Lean ; Overview of lean production system – Identify areas for improvement -Value

stream mapping VSM

UNIT II IMPLEMENTATION OF KAIZEN 7

Planning and Preparation – Five steps of identify the business case, Set goals, Select the team,

Collect baseline data, Plan to support the Kaizen activity: study about basic founding element;

steps to implement kaizen – Schedule for Kaizen, Get employees involved - Find problems –

Identify waste - Create a solution - Test the solution - Analyze the results - Standardize - Repeat

UNIT III TOYOTA PRODUCTION SYSTEM 7

Principles of Toyota production system – Why Toyota uses kaizen techniques; culture and

management philosophy of Toyota; Main ideas for developed for Toyota way; Developing

kaizen ‘eyes’ – Role of management in the system – critical success factor.

UNIT IV KAIZEN TOOLS 7

Introduction, areas of study under ergonomics, system approach to ergonomics model, man-

machine system. Components of man-machine system and their functions. Design of work

places, influence of climate on human efficiency. Influence of noise, vibration and light

UNIT V CASE STUDY 3

Toyota Production system – Related to Continuous Improvement

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will illustrate about identifying areas of improvement in a process.

2. Will perform the steps involved in kaizen activities within an industry

3. Students will compare different kaizen tools for continuous improvement.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. George, M. L., Rowlands, D., Price, M., & Maxey, J. (2005). The Lean Six Sigma Pocket

Toolbook. New York: McGraw-Hill. ISBN: 0-07-144119-0

2. Munro, R. A., Maio, M. J., Nawaz, M. B., Ramu, G., & Zrymiak, D. J. (2008). The

Certified Six Sigma Green Belt Handbook. Milwaukee: ASQ Quality Press. ISBN: 978-

0-87389-698-6.

REFERENCES :

1. David Brunt and David Taylor, “Manufacturing Operations and Supply Chain

Management the Lean Approach”, Vikas Publishing House, New Delhi, 2002.

219

2. Robert Maure - The Spirit of Kaizen: Creating Lasting Excellence One Small Step at a

Time Hardcover – Masaki Iman, Kaizen Institute, 2012

3. Jaime Villafuerte, Jon Miller, and Mike Wroblewski - Creating a Kaizen Culture: Align

the Organization, Achieve Breakthrough Results, and Sustain the Gains - McGraw-Hill

Education 2013

4. Peter F. Drucker - The Practice of Management – 2016

5. P. James Womack - Lean Thinking: Banish Waste and Create Wealth in Your

Corporation - 2003

6. Jaime Villafuerte - Creating a Kaizen Culture : Align the Organization, Achieve

Breakthrough Results, and Sustain the Gains – 2016

7. Jeffrey K. Liker - The Toyota Way to Service Excellence – 2017

WEB RESOURCES:


220

VA18008 KINEMATIC ANALYSIS OF MECHANICAL LINKS L T P C

2 0 0 2

OBJECTIVES :

To develop a thorough understanding of the various mechanisms and its design with an

ability to effectively use the various mechanisms in real life problems.

This course will impart knowledge on planar motions generated from coupler curves.

This course focuses on various synthesis and graphical methods for formation of new

mechanisms

UNIT I ADVANCED KINEMATICS OF PLANE MOTION 10

Introduction to plane motion. The Inflection circle, Euler – Savary Equation, Bobillier’s

Construction, Collineation axis, Hartmann’s Construction, Inflection circle for the relative

motion of two moving planes, Application of the Inflection circle to kinematic analysis,

Polode curvature in the four-bar mechanism, coupler motion.

UNIT II INTRODUCTION TO SYNTHESIS-GRAPHICAL METHODS 10

The Four bar linkage, guiding a body through Two distinct positions, Guiding a body through

Three distinct positions - Function generation- General discussion - Velocity – Pole method,

Path generation: Hrones’s and Nelson’s motion Atlas, Roberts’s theorem

UNIT III INTRODUCTION TO SYNTHESIS – ANALYTICAL METHODS 10

Function Generation: Freudenstien’s Equation, Precision point approximation, Path

Generation: Synthesis of Four-bar Mechanisms for specified instantaneous condition

TOTAL:30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES :

1. Students will compete to execute kinematic analysis of a mechanical linkage.

2. Students will effectively apply the principles of Coupler curves in real time

applications.

3. Students will be able to perform synthesis for multiple specified positions of a linkage.

TEXT BOOKS:

1. John J. Uicker, Gordon R. Pennock and Joseph E. Shigley, “Theory of Machines and

Mechanisms”, Oxford University Press, Fourth Edition, 2014.

REFERENCES :

1. Amitabh Ghosh and Ashok Kumar Mallik, “Theory of Mechanisms and Machines”,

McGraw Hill, Fifth edition, 2019.

2. Charles E Wilson and J. Peter Sadler, “Kinematics and Dynamics of Machinery”,

Pearson, Third Edition, 2008.

3. Henry T. Brown Dover,“507 Mechanical Movements: Mechanisms and Devices”,

Publications Inc, First Edition, 2005.

4. Kevin Russell, Qiong Shen and Rajpal S. Sodhi, “Kinematics and Dynamics of

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_1?ie=UTF8&field-author=Kevin+Russell&search-alias=stripbooks

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_2?ie=UTF8&field-author=Qiong+Shen&search-alias=stripbooks

https://www.amazon.in/s/ref=dp_byline_sr_book_3?ie=UTF8&field-author=Rajpal+S.+Sodhi&search-alias=stripbooks

221

Mechanical Systems”, Implementation in MATLAB® and Sim Mechanics®, ,CRC

Press, Second Edition, 2018.

5. Robert L. Norton,“Design of Machinery: An Introduction to the Synthesis and

Analysis of Mechanisms and Machines”, McGraw-Hill, Fifth Edition, 2011.

WEBRESOURCES:

1. https://onlinecourses.nptel.ac.in/noc20_me21/course



222

VC 18004 DESIGN THINKING AND PROTOTYPING

LABORATORY

L T P C

0 0 4 2

OBJECTIVE:

To apply design thinking principles in arriving at innovative engineering solutions for problems

relevant to society.

SYLLABUS

The course will use a combination of lectures and hands-on project work. The project will give an

opportunity to come up with an innovative engineering solution to problems or challenges

particular to our society.

1. Concepts of design thinking and human centered design thinking.

2. Identifying societal problems using indirect and qualitative research.

3. Forming teams and assignments of major societal problems and arriving at sound concept

hypotheses, and solution using brainstorming sessions. Societal problems such as water

management, energy sources, basic amenities (health, education, food, clean water,

sanitation, connectivity etc), organic farming, livelihood etc. will be assigned as projects.

4. Developing a prototype that allows for meaningful feedback in a real-world environment.

5. Presenting the developed prototype in front of a technically qualified audience.

Evaluation will be done as per following details.

OUTCOMES:

Students will be able to apply design thinking principles in arriving innovative design.

Students will be able to solve unique societal problems.

Students will be able to make prototypes.

Students will be able to work as a team member or lead interdisciplinary engineering teams.

Students will be able to demonstrate the product prototype to technically qualified audience.

223

VC18005 BASICS OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP DEVELOPMENT L T P C 1 0 2 2

OBJECTIVES : To provide Knowledge on Self-discovery and Problem identification.

To provide Skill set on Identifying customer segment and Practice on Business Model.

To understand the Market, Sales and support.

UNIT I Self-Discovery & Problem Identification 6

Orientation of Entrepreneurship – Case Study – activity – Effectuation – Principles of

Effectuation – Identifying Entrepreneur skill.

Problem Identification – Design thinking – look for solution – activity – Brain storming.

UNIT II Customer & Business Model 6

Identifying customer segment, understanding the market – Product selection –activity – value

proposition canvas.

Identify the Problem, Solution and Risk identification – Activity – Business model.

UNIT III Validation and Resources 6

Build a Minimum Viable Product (MVP) – validation and launching of MVP –activity – MVP

Interview.

Cost – Revenue – Pricing – Profitability – Sources of finance – activity – Bootstrap Finance –

Leadership – Identifying Co-founders and Hiring a Team – activity –Pitching about a venture

UNIT IV Market and sales 6

Positioning and branding – network and channels – sales planning – activity – selling skill.

UNIT V Support 6

Project Management – Project tracking – Basics of Business regulations – Activity – capstone

project.

TOTAL : 30 PERIODS

OUTCOMES

CO1: Acquire knowledge and Practice on Self Discovery and Problem identification.

CO2: Understand the concept of Identifying the Customer and Business model.

CO3: Acquire knowledge on various Resource and Practice on validation.

CO4: Acquire knowledge on marketing and sales.

CO5: Practice on Project management.

TEXT BOOKS: 1. S.S.Khanka, “Entrepreneurial Development” S.Chand & Co. Ltd., Ram Nagar, New

Delhi, 2013.

2. Donald F Kuratko, “ Entreprenuership – Theory, Process and Practice”, 9th edition,

Cengage Learning 2014

REFERENCES : 1. Hisrich R D, Peters M P, “Entrepreneurship” 8th Edition, Tata McGraw-Hill, 2013.

224

2. Mathew J Manimala, “Entrepreneurship Theory at Cross Roads: paradigms and Praxis”,

2nd Edition Dream Tech, 2005.

Web Resource:

https://learnwise.wfglobal.org/#/IN/en/courses

225

MC 18001 INDIAN CONSTITUTION AND SOCIETY L T P C

3 0 0 0

OBJECTIVE:

To know about Indian constitution and fundamental rights.

To know about central and state government functionalities in India.

To know about Judicial system and Election commission of India.


Historical Background – Philosophical foundations of the Indian Constitution – Preamble –

Schedules – Amendments.

UNIT II FUNDAMENTAL RIGHTS AND FUNDAMENTAL DUTIES OF THE

CITIZEN

8

Union and Territories – Citizenship - Fundamental Rights – Directive Principles of State Policy –

Fundamental Duties – Directive Principles of state policy.

UNIT III STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF CENTRAL GOVERNMENT 8

Union Government – Structures of the Union Government and Functions – Powers of President,

Vice President, Prime Minister – Cabinet ministers – Parliament.

UNIT IV STRUCTURE AND FUNCTION OF STATE GOVERNMENT 8

State Government – Structure and Functions – Powers of Governor, Chief Minister, Cabinet

ministers – State Legislature

UNIT V STRUCTURE OF JUDICIAL SYSTEM AND MAJOR

FUNCTIONARIES

10

Supreme Court of India - Judicial System in States – High Courts and other Subordinate Courts –

Judicial Review – Case studies. Election Commission of India and its functions.

TOTAL 45 PERIODS

OUTCOMES: Upon completion of the course, students will be able to:

CO CO statement Weightage

CO - 1 Enhance human values, create awareness about law enactment and

importance of Constitution

10 %

CO – 2 To Understand the Fundamental Rights and Fundamental Duties of the

Indian Citizen to instill morality, social values, honesty, dignity of life

and their social Responsibilities.

30%

CO - 3 To Understand the powers and functions of Central Government. 20%

CO – 4 To Understand the powers and functions of State Government. 20%

CO - 5 To Understand the powers and functions of Judicial systems and

Election commission of India.

20%

TEXTBOOKS:

1. Durga Das Basu, “Introduction to the Constitution of India “, Prentice Hall of India, New

Delhi.

2. R.C. Agarwal, (1997) “Indian Political System”, S.Chand and Company, New Delhi.

226

3. Maciver and Page, “Society: An Introduction Analysis “, Mac Milan India Ltd., New

Delhi.

4. K.L.Sharma, (1997) “Social Stratification in India: Issues and Themes”, Jawaharlal

Nehru University, New Delhi.

REFERENCES:

1. Sharma, Brij Kishore, “Introduction to the Constitution of India:, Prentice Hall of India,

New Delhi.

2. U.R.Gahai, “Indian Political System “, New Academic Publishing House, Jalaendhar.

3. R.N. Sharma, “Indian Social Problems “, Media Promoters and Publishers Pvt. Ltd.

Mechanical Engineering

Documents

Transcript of Mechanical Engineering